JP2017080319A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabling a player to adequately enjoy games.SOLUTION: A display screen 720a described in (2) is inserted when a shift is made from an empty-player screen to an option setting screen. The display screen 720a includes an attention raising display 723. The attention raising display 723 displays a message of "Beware of excessive indulgence." in a large font and detailed precautions in a small font. The game machine can perform the attention raising when a player is in a calm state before starting a game or by interrupting the game by setting the display timing of the attention raising display 723 at the option setting timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 128

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine has a function for providing an environment so that the player can play the game safely and securely. For example, in order to prevent the player from forgetting to take a prepaid card, a warning display is given to the player. There is a gaming machine that performs.

JP 2013-236673 A

  However, while gaming machines provide games that are recognized as familiar and easy popular entertainment, in some cases, the players may be excessively involved in the game, which may damage the healthy gaming environment. There are concerns.

  In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy a game moderately.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a reception unit and a control unit. The accepting unit accepts an operation that does not affect the game result. The control unit alerts the player about the game ingestion based on the operation received by the receiving unit.

  According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the player can enjoy the game moderately.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 8 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud & winning prize monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning number counter update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a special figure fluctuation process transfer setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display middle process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fanfare / interval process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process 1 in the small hitting fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a fanfare / interval process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process during special winning opening opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening open | release process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening remaining ball process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 of the fanfare / interval of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a small hitting fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a process process setting process for small hits of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the middle hit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation | movement transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation | movement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit | end process transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit | end process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol fluctuation | variation control process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blink control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a 2 byte distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general power prize winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transfer setting process in the normal fluctuation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the usual figure change of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process in the normal map display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during normal map display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process in the normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric operation transfer setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the general electric operation | movement timing chart of the normal fluctuation winning device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general electric power remaining ball process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process shift setting process of the common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process per common figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the external information edit process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit classification of the special figure game of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode for every ending classification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode effect display after completion | finish of hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the company logo display after completion | finish of hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting A display after completion | finish of hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting B display after completion | finish of hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game mode effect display with the decoration design after the completion | finish of hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game system command process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ending setting process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen without an alert display in the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with a warning display in the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alert condition of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with the alert display by message replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with the alerting display by background replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the production control apparatus of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with the alert display by message replacement in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting edit process in the production control apparatus of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect used as the replacement object of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and replacement content. It is a figure which shows an example of the edit item choice at the time of alerting reset of the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment, and the edit item option at the time of alerting set. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment, and a push button. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the display screen at the time of the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the display screen at the time of the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display and audio | voice output of the display apparatus in the option setting of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with a warning display at the time of the option setting in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen with the alerting setting at the time of the option setting in the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the welcome message setting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the welcome message of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the privilege which the game machine of the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment provides to a player. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting aspect according to the alerting repetition number of the modification 6 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting triggered by the detection of the game effect intervention of the modification 7 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the background scroll display of the modification 8 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the penetration self-diagnosis of the modification 9 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the alerting process in the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting timing (attention schedule) and alerting time slot | zone (attention schedule) of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting aspect of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of RAM initialization of 5th Embodiment, and a command at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation type command of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch fluctuation system command of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure game system command of 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are built in, and decorations and effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, if a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormal A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 and an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher are shown. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls that are paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. Furthermore, an option setting unit 25 for allowing the player to set various options is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. A plurality of selection button switches 25 a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets an effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 produces an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) on a display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for discharging a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the game ball 32 supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device is used as a game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Further, when the player operates the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, or the brightness of the game board 30 can be set. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 includes, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, on the display screen, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Also, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, an out-out port 30 a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize-winning port or the like is provided below the normal variation winning device 37.
Further, in the game area 32, below the center case 40 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. It changes from the closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the big prize opening is closed to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, for example, in a special gaming state or in a small hit game. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the big winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the gaming areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and the right game area is reached. The game balls thus fired are configured to pass through a flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display part 52, a special figure 1 symbol display part 53, a special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and a universal symbol display part. 55, an ordinary map hold display unit 56, and a state display unit 57.

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a control system for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 To be enabled.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V, DC 5V, etc. from the DC 32V voltage. A normal power supply unit 410 having power, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for informing the occurrence and recovery of the error.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, Alternatively, it may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing the generation unit 430.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized based on this signal. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state where so-called full rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state where the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the change mode is stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and in order to display the result mode, the left and right change display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas among the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that is the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device to output the gaming machine 10. Perform overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display with reach and non-reach display, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111A serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Also, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit to drive out a payout motor based on a loan request signal from the card unit so as to pay out a rental ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37. These are connected to the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the prize opening switch 35a, and the big prize opening switch 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38, such that the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, when the detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, or the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. The abnormality detection signal 1 output to the first input port 123 is input to the second input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is asserted (changed to an effective level) by enabling the signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. Thus, reading can be performed. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on it and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization that is connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch that does not require any processing, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of a port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus. Yes.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and includes a large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a general electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data is provided. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. Can be supplied to an external device. In addition, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 displays a video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for this purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control, production time management, and the like.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. In addition, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  The sound source LSI 314 is connected to an audio ROM 327 that stores audio data. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided, and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect agent switch 47 for detecting the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The main control microcomputer by detecting the on / off state of the (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, it is output from the main control microcomputer 311 and supplied to the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors and the like. These are reset. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random number value for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Compared with the determination value stored in the table, the process of determining a missed hit of the normal map display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the regular symbol display unit 55, a process for displaying a regular symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the usual figure change display game is out of place, the normal symbol display unit 55 performs control to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this start storage, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game. A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, processing for displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for performing the progress control of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 to the start winning region (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37). .

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. And a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A can open the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize device 38 by the big prize solenoid 38b, for example, so that the game ball can flow into the big prize mouth. To control. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. The control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round and this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a big prize opening / closing control means for performing control for opening and closing the big prize opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of control, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-short state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on a result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed such that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power opening time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per stop symbol (opening time of the general power) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the normal map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal variable prize winning game 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game so as to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) as the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 distributes various state display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display part 52, the special figure 1 symbol display part 53, and the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 are displayed. A general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a state display unit 57. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by lighting the four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by lighting the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by lighting the eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The regular symbol display unit 55 displays symbols in the regular symbol game by lighting the four LEDs LED_24 to LED_27. The usual figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of holds in the usual figure game by lighting the two LEDs LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_22 and LED_23.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, slave control means (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. 112 needs to be operated continuously. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if such annoying operation is not performed, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on Can be prevented from being accepted.

  Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7) is performed, and then a process for monitoring the time of standby time and the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on is determined. A determination is made (step S9).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine 10 to be cut off. . In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with malfunctions at power-on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that until the end of the standby time, access to the RAM 111C is not permitted, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained. There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to take a backup of the RAM 111C, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. ] Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the timer value is “0” (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (step S16).

  When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. To make it possible.

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it transfers to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing for starting a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. A bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random numbers according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the special symbol hit pattern is determined) RWM as the initial value (start value) of random numbers (big hit design random numbers, small hit design random numbers), random numbers that determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the normal figure (per hit design random number) Is saved in a predetermined area (step S33), and an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. Configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing that is a processing unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be updated by a counter using “+1” or “−1”, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without being overlapped until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit bonus random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and when such a method is adopted, In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all Processing for outputting off data to the output port is performed (step S40).

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means, when turning on the power, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (game control) Device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is a checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by “+1” (step S105), and the repetition number is updated by “−1” (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation has been completed (step S107). If the calculation has not been completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is changed to “+1”. Is updated (step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the small hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the normal variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal variation game Is a random number. The small hit design random number does not exist in a model without small hits, and the hit design initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing in the above-described main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S123) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. In addition, when the signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main process, the output permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125), a random number update process 1 (step S126), and a random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and error monitoring ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) is performed to check whether the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Also, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing a process relating to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S130) for performing a process relating to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61. Fraud monitoring process to check whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board (step S132), fraudulent board radio wave to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) are interrupted. Automatically performed on return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of input processing according to the first embodiment.

  In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, an address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), an address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S146). Unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and switch reading processing (step S148) is performed. Here, “preparation” in the first embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared ( Step S151), bit data to be inverted is prepared (Step S152). Then, a switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the switches monitored by the first input port 122 include a glass frame opening detection switch 63, a body frame opening detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball break switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. As a switch to be monitored by the second input port 123, the start port 1 switch 36a (“start port 1 winning signal”) and the start port 2 switch 37a (by pattern branching, “start port 2 winning signal” “normal electric accessory 1”). Also output as winning signal 1 ”), winning port switch 35a (“ ordinary winning port winning signal ”), large winning port switch 38a (“ special electric accessory 1 winning signal ”) and gate switch 34a (“ regular symbol 1 related signal ”). There is a gate passing signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the switch reading process according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S164). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

  When the delay time (about 100 μs) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S166). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings and a different bit is 0 is created (step S170), and a logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step S171).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created by setting the same bit in the first and second readings to 0 and different bits to 1 (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the previous retained bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the previous time and the current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S175), The switch reading process ends.

  In addition, when the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the big prize opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by “+1” in the range of “0” to “3” (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter Line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically turning on LED_00 to LED_31 of the collective display device 50, round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, universal figure display, universal figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as a short time state or a high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for output of external information (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is “door / frame open” and “security signal”.

  Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step S189). The external information to be synthesized here includes “hit signal 1”, “hit signal 2”, “hit signal 3”, “hit signal 4”, “symbol determined number signal”, “start-up signal”, “main prize ball” Signal "and the like. Next, the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire are synthesized (step S190), and the synthesized data are output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information and for outputting the permission permission signal (step S191).

  Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). Thereafter, the data output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

  Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output is loaded and synthesized to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a payout command transmission process according to the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process for transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission process, first, each of the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls), which is to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 2 storing up to 255 winnings (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the counting of all the winning counter areas has been checked. Is determined (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted ("-1" is updated) (step S204). The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S205). Next, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or greater than “0” (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by “+1” (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area. (Step S211). Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and 10 payouts are issued from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, it is determined in step S203 that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than “0” (step S209; N). If the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0”, the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by “−1” (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. Therefore, no subtraction is performed. In this way, the payout command is not sent every timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the payout command is transmitted under the condition that the payout control board can pay out the winning ball.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). When the value of the payout command transmission timer is determined to be “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions that the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) are as follows: “Payout operation”, “Ball lending operation”, “Shoot ball breakage error”, “Overflow error”, “Frame radio wave fraud "In", "Dispensing ball detection switch is abnormal (switch that monitors the dispensed ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when not = 0).

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If all areas have not been checked (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), the payout busy signal is determined to be busy (step S214; Y) in step S214. In step S217, when it is determined that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, the payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the usual big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). Further, when the normal jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time of the loaded bonus symbol random number symbol random number next time Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

  If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the winning initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded winning random number is set to the corresponding random number counter ( It is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

  If the winning design random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the winning design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning design random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning design random number corresponds. A register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update processing 2 according to the first embodiment. This random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2, 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Is updated, and the update target is switched every time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at the time of different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for designating in order which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is changed from “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the production random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a random counter such as a counter (hereinafter referred to as an M1 counter) used for DRAM refresh or the like provided in the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which a correct value is set is loaded (step S254). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as the addition value using the mask value (hereinafter, this is masked). Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “0”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set ( Step S260) and the process proceeds to Step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S264), and this value is 1 byte. Save in the random number area below the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S267). Then, the random number update process 2 is finished.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning mouth monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the big winning mouth switch 38a in the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38). And data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there are frauds (illegal prizes) to be awarded to the big prize opening even though the big prize opening is not open, and to detect normal winnings. .

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S275), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning ( Step S276) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. Number counter update processing (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is the current monitoring target is “0”. To “3” (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch, the shot blowout error from the dispensing control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the dispensing abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on kana (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, according to the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is “0” (step S284). If the value of the status scan counter is not “0” (step S284; N), the winning prize switch / status monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred next does not have a gaming machine state monitoring target. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is set for setting the target of monitoring (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so the monitoring is performed with a period of 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. Each winning mouth monitoring table prepared in the winning mouth switch / error monitoring process includes “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “illegal prize” "Lower address of number area", "Unauthorized winning error notification command", "Unauthorized winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination)", "Award switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" Assume that information is defined.

  This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed for the large prize opening switch 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the winning ball, In addition to monitoring fraud.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning mouth switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened when the prize opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the big prize opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the start opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is being executed based on the hit of the usual figure.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of the target illegal winnings is updated by “+1” (step S294), and the number of illegal winnings after the addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored ( For example, it is determined whether the number is 5 or more (step S295).

  Note that the number of determinations is five because, for example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the count switch period. This is to prevent the player from immediately determining that the player has won a prize or that the signal is noisy when the prize is passed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized determination from being easily made until it is not necessarily illegal.

  If it is not equal to or greater than the determined number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (step S295; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud determination number (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a winning number counter updating process (step S301) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process ends. Note that information that is not permitted to update the notification timer includes a big prize opening switch 38a. This is because one large winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer is updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer updating, updating at the timing of the big prize opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303; Y) as in the case of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process later and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning apparatus 37, the target notification timer is “0”. Otherwise, “−1” is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the prize opening switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is one of the big prize opening switches 38a, and when the prize opening switch subject to gaming machine state monitoring is the other big prize opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 38, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). Note that the update of the notification timer is always permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the big winning opening switch 38a or the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is “0” (step S305). If the value is not “0” (step S305; N), that is, if the time has not expired, fraud & winning monitoring is performed. The process ends. If the value is “0” (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S306), and the fraud winning release flag is set as the fraud flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, Clear (step S309), and compare the prepared illegal flag with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S310). If the notification timer value is not “0” (step S308; N), that is, if the notification timer value is “0” in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is prepared. Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S310; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S311), and the production command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above process, the fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when fraud occurs, and the illegal prize fraud cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the fraud cancellation, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278 and S301) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process according to the first embodiment. It should be noted that the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “repetition count” information and “data for determining whether or not there is an input” defined for each switch. (Monitor switch bit) ”,“ Lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ Lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

  In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target prize counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs. (Step S325). If no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of “0” to “65535”. If an overflow has occurred (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). Thereby, the winning number counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of “0” to “255”. If an overflow has occurred (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

  In step S331, when the table address is updated to the address of the next record, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S332). If all the switches have not been monitored (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S322). When monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process according to the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area” and “the port of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored. "Lower address of the input status area", "Mask data to extract only the bit of the target signal", "Signal ON judgment data", "Status OFF command (in the case of error system, meaning of error notification end command)", Information of “status on command (meaning error notification start command in case of error system)”, “status off monitoring timer comparison value”, and “status on monitoring timer comparison value” is defined respectively.

  In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring target signal is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determination is made (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on means that the error system is a normal state that is not an error, and the touch switch is a state that is not touched. Further, the case where the signal to be monitored is ON means an error (abnormal or illegal) state with respect to an error system, and a touch state with respect to a touch switch.

  In step S342, if the signal is not on (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, if the signal is on (step S342; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target state monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. An effect command setting process for transmitting either a command or a state on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment.

  In this payout busy signal check process, it is first determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag ( In step S362), an OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  In step S361, when the payout busy signal is ON (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S366; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S129) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure game processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning port 36 forming the first start winning port and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted. The game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when time is up or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for executing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing ball processing, etc. is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is “5”, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, while the round is the final round. Processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, setting of information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, etc. is performed (step A13).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, setting the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “8”, the setting of the information required for performing the small hit action moving process, the small hit end screen command, the small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process to be performed (step A16) is performed.

If the special figure game process number is “9” in step A7, the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol 1 symbol display part 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special symbol 1 symbol display part 53 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 is performed, and a special figure game process Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do it.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether there is a winning at the starting port 1. It is determined whether or not (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the start port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (medium power support is in progress) (step A104). . Note that the determination in step A104 is based on whether or not the gaming state is being supported by ordinary power, and does not include the level of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the start opening 1 (start winning prize opening 36) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variation winning prize apparatus 37 will not win unless it is right-handed. Therefore, the short-time state is a gaming state in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the start port 1 has won a prize during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and to cause the effect control device 300 to issue a notification (warning) to instruct to make a right-hand strike.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A107), a special-purpose starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the start port 2 (step A111; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal variable winning. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112). If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 is performed. The process proceeds to the following process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). A start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, no winning information is set for the start port to be monitored among the start port 1 (start winning port 36) and the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A121). It is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitoring target start switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) and the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37), the information indicating that there is a winning for the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. .

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart start port switch common process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.
In the special figure start port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored out of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 after passing through step A134. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure hold (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit ( Step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) to be updated by “+1” ( In step A136), the start port winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure hold is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the start port 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the starting port 1 (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol random number is prepared. Save in the storage area (step A144).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable display game. The start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as the start storage serving as the right to execute the. Further, the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure hold information determination process, first, the starting port winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) is winning (step A151).

If it is determined at step A151 that the winning is not for the start port 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the start port 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).

In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not made at the starting port 1 (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter Perform the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the start port 1 has been won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), the process proceeds to step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. To do.

  Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process (step A169) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the result control (result of prefetching) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is effected before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205 and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is not in the process of opening the big winning opening (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not in the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit (in the small hit gaming state) is being processed (step A203).

  If the small hit process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hitting is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.

  Note that the special figure game process number does not shift until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, so the progress state of the game is checked by checking the special figure game process number value. Can be checked. Therefore, the special figure game process number is checked to determine whether the big winning opening is being opened, the big winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. Let's do it.

  Then, “0” is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the winning prize opening added in the current winning prize opening switch monitoring process (step A205). Is determined (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210 and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the prize counter is set to “ +1 "is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 2 (step A210). If there is no input to the special prize opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. The subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A211), an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the prize counter is set to “ +1 "is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. If the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215), and if the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215). In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  When the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216), and if the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; In Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the winning prize count (step A217), and the winning prize count is calculated. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) or more is reached (step A218).

  If the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning prize count is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step A218; Y), the winning prize count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221).

  If it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the process is being processed during the small hit (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

  In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In step A306, if the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special-figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0”, which is a process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as a process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S321). A322).

  Then, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A323), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is finished. To do.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure variation display game is executed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure 2 variation start processing according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do as.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table that is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A353), and information on the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is stored. “0” is cleared (step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. In this way, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A372), and information on the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is stored. “0” is cleared (step A373). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, and A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of jackpot determination processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) (step A383). .

  If the probability is high (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value ( Step A386). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A385). A386).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value is determined. Determine (step A392).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of holds) 1) is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the special gaming state is finished. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, in the case of a special big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1, the transition-destination effect mode is a certain probability variation confirmation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit design random number is loaded from the small hit design random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). Then, the information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to “0” (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the reservation number 1 (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the special gaming state is finished. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit in the special figure 2 is a special production mode in which the production mode of the transition destination becomes the certainty change determination regardless of the big hit symbol. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to “0” (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and at the starting port 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37). A variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game balls. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of a short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

  In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

  Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment.

  Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is set. The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table is different depending on whether it is for winning or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place (step A474). If it is out of place (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed, The process proceeds to A477, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is not out of place (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, information on the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1”, which is the process number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a process number (step A511), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A512).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Note that the signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1”, which is the process number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a process number (step A521), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A522).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, and 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the symbol pattern for big hit, the symbol pattern for big hit, and the symbol pattern for small hit, but different display times may be set.

  Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, “2”, which is the process number related to the special figure display process, is set as a process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal. The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation signal.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a stop flag related to the variable stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag region ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a stop flag related to the variable stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. (Step A617), and the special figure display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of special figure display processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart display process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information on the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). If the big hit flag 2 is determined to be a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit (second figure 2) of the second special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous action device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal. Including.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), round A number upper limit table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol per signal. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, “16” or “4”) is acquired, Save in the upper limit area of the round number of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the special decoration command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a lottery (a so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is turned on when it is a big hit in the short time state, and is turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when a big hit with a ball is off and turned off when a big hit without a ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game are set. (Step A719), the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (Step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, an effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the information on the incorrect winning prize number area of the big winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

  When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is not in effect (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration figure command area, prepared (step A729), and an effect command setting process (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is generated. In order to prevent the player from being aware of this, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, the remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). Note that the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be the same value (number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. ).

  If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, details of the high probability variation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the special chart display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of high probability variation frequency update processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability variation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step A751), and if the special figure high probability is not significant (step A751; N), the high probability variation frequency update processing is performed. Exit.

  When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A752). It is determined whether or not the probability variation number is “0” (step A753).

  If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A753; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area ( Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two jackpot signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & no time short or high probability & short time) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of the high probability & short time are the signals that turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signals that turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the timeless number is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left hand instruction is a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability variation number updating process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of effect mode information check processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the production mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), The effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the production mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the production mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not a non-updated code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number that is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by “−1” (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect is “0” (step A773). The process of step A772 serves as a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game.

  If the remaining effect rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. When the remaining effect rotation speed is “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774), The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be transferred (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode change information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information relating to the next rendering mode of the transitioning rendering mode is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). In addition, the process of step A776 performs effect mode execution control means for performing execution control of any effect mode (game mode) among a plurality of effect modes (game mode) corresponding to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the rendering mode is transmitted without transmitting the command to the rendering control device 300. The information check process ends. When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A781), and the production command is set. Processing (step A782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

  If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check is performed. End the process.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process for setting the transition to the fanfare / interval process according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set as a process number (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signals relating to the start of the big hit include, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output with a big hit + small hit) and a signal for turning on four signals (output with a big hit).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). Signals related to the end of high probability & short time are, for example, a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal that turns off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Thereafter, information on the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796). Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the high probability state display (step A799). A special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The information of the high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and the game control apparatus 100 manages the effect mode, so the information on the remaining effect rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). Then, the non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (launching position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED is turned on so The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during small hitting fanfare of the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7”, which is a process number related to the small hitting fanfare process, is set as a process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one big hit signal (outputs with a big hit + small hit).

  Then, a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal regarding the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol one small hit signal.

  Then, the information on the illegal winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag area is saved in the illegal winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by “+1” (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process (Step A903) is performed.

  After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the value (step A906).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (in the case of the first embodiment, 0.2 s) is set in the special game processing timer area. After saving (step A907), a special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A909) is performed to release the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set as the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A908), a special winning opening opening process transition setting process (Step A909) is performed in order to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.

  Here, in the first embodiment, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all long open), (5) 16R, big prize Mouth open information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, big prize opening information 7 (1 -4R is set to long open, and 5-16R is set to short open).

  Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the large winning opening opening process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the special prize opening opening according to the first embodiment.

  In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, “4”, which is a process number related to the process for opening a special prize opening, is set as a process number (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A912). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal related to the start of opening of the big prize opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information on the number-of-award winning number count area for storing the number of winnings to the winning a prize opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special prize opening opening process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process according to the first embodiment.

  In the process of opening the special winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9s) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1009), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a big winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

  If the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Thereafter, an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.
[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) in the above-described big winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, “5”, which is the processing number related to the winning ball remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, off data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the extra winning opening remaining ball process according to the first embodiment.

  In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

  In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), and the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening release information, and the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1113), the big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106), and the big winning opening information is If it is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the big prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107) (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. The subsequent processing is performed.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set as a process number (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal related to the end of the special winning opening is a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, for example.

Then, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 ends.
[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6”, which is a process number related to the jackpot end process, is set as a process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal related to the end of the special winning opening is a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, for example.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information of the big winning opening release information area storing the big winning opening release information determination flag is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end process according to the first embodiment.

  In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is time-saving operation data (step A1201). If it is not the short time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the short time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

  Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

  As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in either “high probability / with time reduction” or “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the first embodiment, since the probabilistic state (so-called ST state) is always obtained when the big hit ends, the probability information commands include “high probability / short time / direction mode A”, “high probability / short time / direction” “Mode B”, “High probability / short time / direction mode C”, “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process. ”,“ Low probability / no time reduction / production mode B ”, and“ low probability / no time reduction / production mode C ”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a short-time state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1214). A1216).

If a short-time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process shifts. Setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of a time-short state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal related to the absence of the short-time state is, for example, a signal for turning off two jackpot signals.

  Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the short time state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 variation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation count area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting process 1 is finished.
[Big jackpot end setting 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the short-time state is, for example, a signal for turning on two jackpot signals. Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.

  Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. , A signal for turning on the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-shortening state, but the right-handed mode is set from the middle-hit, so the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0”, which is the process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S1241). A1242).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot include, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

  Next, a signal relating to the end of jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal regarding the end of the jackpot is a signal for turning off the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning off the continuous action device operating signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 signal, and a special symbol 2 signal. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

  Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, details of the small hitting fanfare process (step A15) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of small hitting fanfare processing according to the first embodiment.

In the small hitting fanfare process, the small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hitting fanfare process is terminated.
[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8”, which is the process number related to the small hit / medium process, is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, a small hit release time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hitting operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, on data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and information of the special winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the special winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting / measuring control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hitting / medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during small hits]
Next, details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit / medium process, first, the small hit / medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit / medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit / medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not this is the case (step A1402).

  If the value of the loaded small hitting control pointer is not equal to or larger than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hitting control pointer in the small hitting control pointer area is updated by “+1” (step A1403). ), A small hitting action transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hitting medium process is terminated. When the value of the loaded small hitting control pointer is equal to or larger than the small hit action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area (step A1405). It is determined whether or not the figure is in a high probability (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 is based on the probability state and not the short-time state.

  When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit motion transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting operation transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit / medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, or “4” (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit / medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off data of the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is ended.

  When the value of the small hitting control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “1”, “3”, or “5” (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hitting control pointer is set to the value. The corresponding special winning opening time (200 ms) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the special winning a prize opening (special variable prize-winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

  Here, the small hitting operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart of the small hit operation according to the first embodiment. In the figure, the numbers in the squares indicate the values of the control pointers.

  The small hitting operation includes a small hitting fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent weight. A time (1500 ms), a subsequent winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent winning opening opening time (200 ms), a remaining ball processing time (1900 ms), It is a series of operations for a total of 7600 ms, which consists of a small hitting ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hitting operation, the control pointer value becomes “0” after the first big winning opening opening time elapses, and the control pointer value goes through the respective processes corresponding to “0” to “5”. The value of the control pointer is “6”. In this way, in the case of the small hitting operation, the small hitting remaining ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variable winning device 38. In the small hitting operation, the small hitting ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that an apparent ending time is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time 1900 ms to the control small hitting ending time 100 ms.

  Note that during the small hitting fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hitting ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the big winning port solenoid 38b. Further, during the special winning opening opening time, the special variable winning apparatus 38 is opened by the on-control of the special winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, first, “9”, which is the process number related to the small hit remaining ball process, is set as the process number (step A1421), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A1422).

  Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball process, the small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining ball process is terminated.
[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10”, which is the process number related to the small hit end process, is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1512). ).

  Then, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1515), the information of the small hitting control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end process according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process, first, a flag relating to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1601). A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 has a special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed.

  When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619 and the subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and an effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. Also, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and an effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time reduction state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

  In order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end process ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0”, which is a process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as a process number (step A1631), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1631). A1632).

  Then, a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. The signal related to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol small hit signal.

  Then, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637), the illegality monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is executed. finish.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the above-described special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the effect command setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the production command setting process, first, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION”, as in the case of a production command. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

The status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  By writing the command data (ACTION) into the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be.

  In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The production control device 300 receives these commands and performs production control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control apparatus 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the symbol variation control process according to the first embodiment.

  In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether the symbol is varying (step A1801), and it is determined whether the symbol is varying as a result of the check (step A1802). .

  If the symbol is changing (step A1802; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the flashing control timer for measuring the variation time of the target symbol is updated by “−1” (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the flashing control timer is “0” (step A1805).

  When the flashing control timer is “0” (step A1805; Y), the initial value of the flashing control timer corresponding to the target symbol and state is acquired (step A1806), and the initial value of the flashing control timer is set to the target symbol. Save in the blinking control timer area (step A1807). The blinking control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by “+1” (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the blinking control timer is not “0” (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

  Then, display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. To do.

  In step A1802, if not changing (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. To do.

  In addition, on the variation control table prepared in the special figure game process, information on the lower address of the variation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stoppage), and the address of the display table 1 (for variation) is defined. Yes.

[Blinking control timer initial value table]
Next, details of the blinking control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired by the above-described symbol variation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. FIG.

The initial value of the blinking control timer is set for each target symbol (special diagram 1, special diagram 2, general diagram) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1 and 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1 and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 160 ms when the usual figure is in the state 1 and 120 ms when the usual figure is in the state 2.

  The initial value of the blinking control timer is smaller than the value of state 1 but is not limited to this. The initial value of the blinking control timer may have a larger value in state 2 than in state 1. For example, the initial value of the blinking control timer is 60 ms when special figure 1 is in state 1, 80 ms when special figure 1 is in state 2, and 60 ms when special figure 2 is in state 1. It may be 80 ms when special figure 2 is in state 2, 120 ms when ordinary figure is in state 1, and 160 ms when ordinary figure is in state 2.

  Note that the state 2 is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to State 1, and when Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, State 2 It corresponds to.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the universal symbol display unit 55 in addition to the status display unit 57 in the collective display device 50. The status can be displayed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, a special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit 55 in the collective display device 50 instead of the state display unit 57. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display in the first period in the state display unit 57, performs the second state display in the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the universal symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) in the state display unit 57 when the game state transitions from the normal state to the probability variation state or the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is in the gaming state in the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55 when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability variation state is a steady state. Is in a steady state (steady state notification). Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the gaming state with the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state with one or two of the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated gaming state by a combination of display modes of the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. . Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated gaming state by combining the display forms of the state display unit 57, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the game progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The sorting process selects the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, or selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. It is.

  In the distribution process, first, the first data of the prepared latter-half variation group table (selection table), latter-half variation selection table (selection table), and first-half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the top data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half variation pattern group, second-half variation pattern, and first-half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be assigned, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table, the latter-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table is an unsorted code (step A1902; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result ( Step A1907), the distribution process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is not an unsorted code (step A1902; N), the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is displayed. One sort value specified first is acquired (step A1903).

  Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A1903 from the random number values (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the variation pattern setting process. After calculating a new random value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906), the process returns to step A1903.

  That is, in step A1903, after the distribution values specified next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are acquired, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted and a new random value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one latter-half variation selection table, latter-half variation pattern, or first-half variation pattern specified in the latter-half variation group table, the latter-half variation selection table, or the first-half variation selection table is selected. Select the variation number or the first half variation number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A1907), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of 2-byte distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte sorting process, first, is the leading data of the latter half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting process a non-sorting code (ie, “0”)? (Step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the top data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first defined in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random value loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (value of variation pattern random number 1) (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005). When the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2005; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006), the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number as the new random value in step A2005, and a new random value is added. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A2005 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the usual game process according to the first embodiment. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, the display of the usual figure is set, and the like.

  In this ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power prize switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a. To do. Next, if the usual game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process (step B5) for setting the referenced ordinary game sequence branch table in the register is performed (step B5), and a process (step B6) for acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number is performed using the table. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed with the game process number.

  In step B7, when the game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal fluctuation process are performed. For this purpose, the usual processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for the purpose is performed. If the game process number is “1” in step B7, a process for changing the normal map (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map is performed.

  In step B7, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the electric power depending on whether the time is short or the A general diagram display process (step B10) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the process during the drawing. In step B7, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map (steps for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map or to perform the baseball remaining ball process) B11) is performed.

  If the game process number is “4” in step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the process for ending the normal map. If the game process number is "5" at step B7, a per-figure end process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the normal chart process (step B8).

  After that, a general variation control table for controlling the variation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display is prepared (step B14), and the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15). To complete the ordinary game process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (step B102). Here, the right-handed gaming state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time (short during normal power support). In the case of a game state in which the player strikes right (Step B102; Y), the process proceeds to Step B105. If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), an effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, and the number of ordinary drawings held is obtained. Is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

  When the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved symbols is updated by “+1” (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved symbols is updated. Calculate (step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  In addition, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending drawings is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the general power winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this general power winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal variable winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. Is determined (step B111). If it is normal (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and if there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by “+1” (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When the determination is made, based on the fact that the count of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the ordinary power, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal figure ( Step B115), the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to zero (Step B116), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal map is not being reached (step B111; N), if it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N), or step B114. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the ordinary power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ordinary processing in the first embodiment. In this ordinary processing, it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B121). If the number of reserved drawings is “0” (step B121; Y), The normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal process is terminated. Further, when the usual figure holding number is not “0” (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step B122). The winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the usual fluctuation display game is higher than usual, that is, the time is short (step B124). When the normal probability is not high (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit determination value is set (step B125). When the normal probability is high (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are a common value (for example, “251”). Further, the low probability lower limit determination value and the high probability lower limit determination value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit determination value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”). In comparison, the high probability lower limit determination value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability increases at a high probability as compared with a low probability, and is, for example, 0/251 when the probability is low and 250/251 when the probability is high.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value. Is determined (step B128). In step B127, when the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is, In the case of a miss, the slip information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the slip stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the slip symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). In steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value and greater than or equal to the lower limit determination value, that is, if it is a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area ( In step B132), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the usual figure holding number is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of held maps 1, the rankings of the number of held maps “2” to “4” are suspended after the number of held maps “1”. The process of moving up one by one is performed. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the number of reserved customary numbers 4 in the random number storage area per common number is cleared, and the number of reserved general figure numbers is decremented by “1”.

Then, a normal process transition setting process (step B140) is performed, and the normal chart normal process is terminated.
[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above normal figure normal process will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal routine transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B151). B152). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process for setting a process for changing a normal map according to the first embodiment. In the process for changing the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal figure (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area ( In step B162), the normal time change time (common to low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B163). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal variable display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). It should be noted that the signal related to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 variation signal.

  Next, a changing flag indicating that the normal fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general display indicator, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (step B166), and the transition processing setting process for the normal map change process is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the process during normal map change (step B9) in the above general game process will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal-variation process in the first embodiment. In this normal map change process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map change process is terminated.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B171) in the process for changing the normal map will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process for setting a transition to a normal map display according to the first embodiment. In this normal chart display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the general chart display process (step B181), and the process number is set in the general game process number area. Save (step B182). Thereafter, the usual game display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the usual game process timer area (step B183). Further, a signal related to the end of fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). Note that the signal related to the end of the normal variation is a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 variation signal.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the normal map change display game is stopped is saved in the normal map change control flag area (step B185), and the normal display display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal map display process according to the first embodiment. In the process of displaying a normal map, first, the hit flag (hit information or disappointment information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the RWM hit flag area information is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), a hit process setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, a hit start pointer value (one of control pointers “0”, “2”, “4”) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal pointer control pointer area (step B195), The general electric circuit opening time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general map stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general graphic game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B197) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step B197) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. In this normal process transition setting process, first, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B201), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B202). After that, a signal related to the start of the hitting of the normal fluctuation display game (signal related to the hit of the normal fluctuation display game) and a signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). It should be noted that the signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game is a signal for turning on the normal signal per symbol, and the signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation is a signal for turning on the signal for operating the normal electric accessory 1 It is.

Next, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B204).
In addition, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the normal power illegality for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period. The information on the winning area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the normal process transition setting process is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal hit processing according to the first embodiment. In this process for normal maps, first, a control pointer for normal maps is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded control pointer for normal maps is the value of the upper limit value area for control pointers for normal maps. It is determined whether or not (the value of hit end) has been reached (step B212).

  If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B212; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by "+1" (step B213). Then, the ordinary electric operation transition setting process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the normal figure is terminated. Further, when the value of the control pointer during normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal map (the value of end of hit) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal power operation transition setting is made. A process (step B214) is performed, and the process during the normal drawing is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-described normal process will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a normal power operation transition setting process according to the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B222). In order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B223), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, the normal power release time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B224), ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the general power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B226. That is, “4” is set as the process number (step B226) in order to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B227), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B228). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B229), and the normal electric operation transition setting process is ended.

  Next, the ordinary power operation in the normal variation winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a general electric operation timing chart of the normal variation winning device of the first embodiment. In the figure, the numbers in the squares indicate the values of the control pointers.

  The normal electric operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the normal variation winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of the normal display time (600 ms), the subsequent general electric power release time (500 ms), and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms) thereafter. It is a series of operations. In the case of winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes “4” after the normal power release time elapses, and the normal power remaining ball processing is performed after the normal variable winning device 37 is released once.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variation winning device 37 is as follows: the normal signal display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent This is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, consisting of the open time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the winning symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes “2” after the first public power open time elapses, and the control pointer value passes through the processes corresponding to “2” and “3”. The value of the pointer is “4”. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the ordinary power remaining ball processing is performed after the two opening operations of the normal variation winning device 37.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the normal variation winning device 37 is as follows: the normal signal display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent This is a series of operations for a total of 6700 ms, which is composed of a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent general power release time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of winning symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first public power open time elapses, and the values of the control pointer correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”. After each process, the value of the control pointer becomes “4”. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed after the opening operation of the normal variation winning device 37 three times.

  Note that, during the normal time display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the general electric solenoid 37c. In addition, during the ordinary power opening time, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened by turning on the ordinary power solenoid 37c.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the ordinary power remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process according to the first embodiment. In this ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, the normal electric power end ball shift setting process (step B231) is performed, and the electric power remaining ball process is terminated.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal signal end process transition setting process (step B231) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a universal hit process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the general figure end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the normal ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B243), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information in the general electric power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during normal drawing is cleared (step B246), and the normal drawing end processing transition setting processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the normal figure end process (step B13) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. FIG. 92 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the universal hit end process according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed, and the normal figure end process ends.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-described normal figure end process will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the normal routine process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hitting of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). It should be noted that the signal related to the end of the normal-game variable game is a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 variable signal.

  After that, a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal chart normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. .

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of segment LED editing processing according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings relating to driving of the LEDs constituting the round display section 51, the special figure 1 hold display section 52, the general figure hold display section 56, and the status display section 57 provided in the batch display device 50, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the flashing control timer is updated by adding “1” (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output hold timing of the general map hold display is determined (step C12). If it is the output on timing (step C12; Y), the general map hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the determination of the output on timing of the usual map hold display can be made by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, a blinking period of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set general map hold number display table 1 or the general map hold number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

  For example, the common figure hold number display table 1 and the common figure hold number display table 2 have the same values for the common figure hold numbers “0” to “2”, but different values for the common figure hold numbers “3” and “4”. It is. As a result, in the general map hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the general map hold number is “0”, the corresponding LED is turned on when the general map hold number is “1”, “2”, and the general map hold number is “3”. , “4” realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output on timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17) and output. When it is not the on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). Note that the determination of the output on timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be made the same as the determination of the output on timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the normal hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). Note that the special figure 1 hold display section 52 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the general figure hold display section 56.

  Next, the output on timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and if it is the output on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21) and output. When it is not the on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). Note that the determination of the output on timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be made the same as the determination of the output on timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by 1 every 4 ms from the normal hold display, it is possible to set a blinking cycle different from the normal hold display.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). The special figure 2 hold display section 58 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the general figure hold display section 56.

  Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game state display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game state display number 1 is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
The game status display table 1 indicates whether or not the game status of the special figure game is short in time (supporting ordinary power), in other words, whether or not it is one of the game status advantageous to the player. The display mode for the display unit 57 to notify is defined. For example, when the LED_29 in the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal” is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, “special time is short (medium power support is in progress)”.

  Thereafter, the game state display table 2 is set (step C28), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is terminated.

  The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, “normal strike (left-handed)” is notified when LED_30 in the status display section 57 is turned off, and “right-handed” is notified when LED_30 is turned on. It should be noted that the period for notifying “right-handed” includes periods corresponding to gaming states such as during big hits, during small hits, and during normal power support.

  Thereby, segment LED edit processing can alert | report a game progress to a player with the set display mode. Accordingly, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display part 52, the special figure 2 hold display part 58, the general figure hold display part 56, and the status display part, which are display mode setting targets by the segment LED editing process. 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

  Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing and panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud will be described. A gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined game value according to the result of the game may be cheated to illegally obtain the game value. Among such fraudulent acts, gaming machines equipped with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets are conventionally known. There are various types of fraud, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are necessary. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be accurately detected.

  In particular, misjudging that an abnormal condition has occurred despite the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred has led to mistrust of the player, and is a cause of game evasion in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important not to perform erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and radio wave detector. For example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed for the purpose of preventing erroneous detection of an abnormal state.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 that constitutes a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and fraud notification is started and ended. In addition, since a magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector which detects the approach of a magnet, a magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), is the magnetic sensor turned on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism has been detected? It is determined whether or not (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has expired (step C33).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), the abnormality is determined. When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. Determine (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. The game control apparatus 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is provided. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer and updated (step C39). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step C40). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), it transfers to the process of step C39.

  When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C40; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step C40; Y), that is, when the time has been up or when the time has already expired and the fraud notification period has ended, If no fraud notification has been made, a command for terminating magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

  If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), a production command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing according to the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 that forms a radio wave detector that detects an abnormal radio wave, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing, first, the board radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step C53), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the board radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the board radio wave sensor detects a single abnormal radio wave.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification is not performed unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. The timer is updated by subtracting “1” (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired and the period of the unauthorized notification ends, If no fraud notification has been made, a command to terminate board radio fraud notification is prepared (step C57), and a board radio fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step C58). It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), a production command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

  By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, it is possible to accurately detect the occurrence of an abnormal state. In other words, a gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when it detects magnetism continuously over a predetermined period of time, it is determined to be in an abnormal state. Generation can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining that an abnormal radio wave is detected as an abnormal state.

  In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected. However, it may be a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a state that is not in an abnormal state is detected, or a predetermined threshold value or more. The state in which magnetism is detected may be abnormal. In the first embodiment, abnormal radio waves are detected simply by receiving a radio wave. However, the radio waves may not be received in an abnormal state or received in an abnormal state. It is good also as the state which received the electromagnetic wave of the frequency which is not. Moreover, it is good also considering the state which detected the electromagnetic wave whose intensity | strength is more than a predetermined threshold, or the electromagnetic wave of a specific frequency as abnormality. When the threshold value is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, or the frequency, a signal may be output when the threshold value is exceeded on the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 side, or the threshold value may be set on the control device side. You may make it monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state, and the abnormal state detection control means detects abnormal magnetism continuously for a predetermined period in the case of a magnetic detector. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. However, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. FIG. 97 is a first diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are displayed. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process for setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and the security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The ON signal of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S71). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78).

  When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. In other words, the initialization of the data stored in the RAM is output as external information until the security signal control timer expires.

  Magnet fraud (step C80; Y), board radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), ordinary electric fraud (step C83; Y), or a grand prize When mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general power fraud, or special prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-state data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting hole signal editing process (step C89) for editing a winning signal at the starting hole. To do. Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C90). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step C91).

  When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92), the external information editing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S91). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out, scheduled game medium payout number) generated by winning the winning a prize becomes a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to the external device.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step C103).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step C103; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by “−1” (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is updated to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the scheduled game medium payout number is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the game ball winning is established, it is faster to generate and send the main prize ball signal than to complete the payout of the game ball by operating the payout device. Between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the number of game media to be paid out is paid out, information related to the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

  That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout conditions are satisfied and before paying out the number of game media to be paid out. To provide an external output means.

  However, if the number of award balls generated is small, and if this amount is not less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of award balls, information on the expected number of game media payouts after the actual payout has been completed May be output. By reducing the unit of the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, “1”), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information related to the scheduled number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out.

  From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined amount of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition In the gaming machine provided with the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. This means that external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

  The external output means (game control apparatus 100) is based on storage means (game control apparatus 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of game game payouts that have not been output to the outside, and establishment of a payout condition. Addition means (game control device 100) for adding the scheduled game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the predetermined game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area has reached a predetermined number Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers to the outside, and the predetermined number of scheduled game medium payout numbers transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. Subtracting means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal according to the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from “OFF” to “ON” when the value of the output control timer is “48”, and from “ON” to “OFF” when the value of the output control timer is “16”. Until the output control timer value becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal composed of an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  Note that, unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device check the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with illegal payout.

  In addition, in the winning during the big hit period, when the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out, and the game medium is paid out after the big hit, the external device only has a winning ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on a win during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (judge) information.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is “0” (step C113).

  If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step C113; N), the start port signal output count is updated by “−1” (step C114), and the start port signal output is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is obtained by adding a time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and a time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level) ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. When the start port signal output count is “0” (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S113). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, the alerting function of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The attention calling function is a function for calling attention to the player using a display or sound. The target of alerting includes “removal” into the game by the player and forgetting to take a prepaid card.

  The gaming machine 10 alerts the player when the special game is won. Therefore, first, the type of jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit type of the special game according to the first embodiment.

  The special game executed in the gaming machine 10 includes jackpot 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 3, jackpot 4, and jackpot. Each round is set with the number of rounds, probability fluctuation, general power support, and ending type.

  The number of rounds is a parameter indicating the hit performance. Probability fluctuation and ordinary power support are parameters indicating the gaming state after hit. The ending type indicates the type of ending displayed on the display device 41 during the ending period. Note that the ending period refers to a predetermined period after the end of the final round. For example, the ending period refers to a period from the closing of the special variable prize-winning device 38 in the final round to the start of a game in a new gaming state (start of symbol variation).

  Note that the probability variation means that the game state with a low probability of hitting a special figure game changes from a gaming state to a high gaming state, and the ordinary electric power support makes it easy to win the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, extension of the opening period). In other words, it means that a gaming state in which a lottery opportunity for the special figure game is increased is achieved. Note that the probability variation and / or the ordinary power support may serve both as a time reduction for shortening the variation display time in the special game.

  For example, the big hit 1 is the number of rounds “16” in the hit, the probability variation up to “100 times” after the end of the hit, and the power transmission support up to “100 times” after the probability variation ends. It is performance that we have. The big hit 1 displays “Ending 1” or “Ending 2” on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  In addition, the big hit 2 is the number of rounds in the middle of “8”, the probability change up to “100 times” after the end of the hit, and the power transmission support up to “100 times” after the probability change ends. It is performance that we have. The big hit 2 displays “Ending 1” or “Ending 2” on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  The jackpot 3 is a performance with no probability fluctuation after the winning end, although it has a general electric power support up to the round number “8” being hit and the fluctuation display “100 times” after the winning end. The big hit 3 displays “ending 3” on the display device 41 after the big hit.

  The big hit 4 is a performance having no power support after the end of the probability variation, although the number of rounds being won is “2” and the probability variation is “100 times” after the end of the winning variation. The big hit 4 displays “Ending 4” on the display device 41 after the big hit.

  In addition, although the small hit has the number of rounds “2” being hit, it is a performance with neither probability fluctuation nor ordinary power support after the hit. Also, for the small hit, “Ending 4” is displayed on the display device 41 after the big hit ends.

  Of each hit, the jackpot 1 is the highest value hit for the player, and the jackpot 2 is the next highest hit value for the player after the jackpot 1. On the other hand, the small hit is the lowest value hit for the player. However, the gaming machine 10 makes it difficult to distinguish the big hit 4 from the small hits, thereby producing the expectation of the probability fluctuation even for the small hits.

Next, the ending type will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode for each ending type according to the first embodiment.
First, “Ending 1” will be described. “Ending 1” is an ending that is selected at the end of the hit when it is the first hit when the win continues among the hits that have a probability variation after the hit ends. For example, “Ending 1” is selected at the end of the hit when the hit that occurred in the gaming state without the probability fluctuation and the ordinary power support is 1 or 2 with big hit.

  “Ending 1” displays a probability change explicit mode entry display from timing T10 to timing T13 (for example, 13000 ms). The probability change explicit mode entry display is a display that indicates to the player that the player enters the game mode (probability change explicit mode) that clearly indicates the probability variation state. The probability change explicit mode entry display is a form of guidance display for guiding a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Here, the probability variation explicit mode entry display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the game mode effect display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (1) is a probability change explicit mode entry display in “Ending 1”. The probability variation explicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the certain variation explicit mode and a display “rush” that clearly indicates the entry into the certain variation explicit mode. The display “entry” is an example of a display that clearly indicates the entry into the probability change explicit mode, and may be a display “start”, a display “first time”, or the like.

  “Ending 1” displays the company logo from timing T13 to timing T14 (for example, 5000 ms) after the probability change explicit mode entry display. The company logo display may be a still image or a moving image, and may be faded in or out in time. The company logo display may be accompanied by voice or music.

  Here, the company logo display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of a company logo display after the hit according to the first embodiment. The company logo display shown in FIG. 105 (1) displays a company logo related to the gaming machine 10. The company logo display is not limited to the name of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10, but may be the name of the selling company, the brand name of the gaming machine 10, etc., and two or more company logos may be displayed or switched simultaneously. Also good. Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (2), the gaming machine 10 may display a company logo in parallel (for example, superimposed) with the probability change explicit mode entry display. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a good sensitivity to the company logo by displaying the company logo together with the guidance display for guiding the gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (3), the gaming machine 10 may display a company logo in parallel with the probability change explicit mode entry display (for example, window display).

  “Ending 1” displays an alert A display from timing T14 to timing T15 (for example, 2000 ms) after the company logo is displayed. The alerting A display is a first alerting display that is given to the player, and is a display that alerts the user to forgetting to take a prepaid card, for example. The notice A display may be a still image including a pictogram or a moving image, and may be faded in or out in time. Further, the alerting A display may be accompanied by voice or warning sound.

  Here, the alerting A display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of a warning A display after the hit according to the first embodiment. The alert A display shown in FIG. 106 (1) displays a message “Please be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft.”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106 (2), the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning A display in parallel (for example, superposition) with the probability change explicit mode entry display. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can give the player interest in the alerting A display by displaying the alerting A display together with the guidance display for guiding the gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106 (3), the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning A display in parallel with the probability change explicit mode entry display (for example, window display).

  “Ending 1” displays a warning B from timing T15 to timing T16 (for example, 2000 ms) after a warning A display. The alerting B display is a second alerting display that is given to the player, for example, a display that alerts the player to the game. The reminder B display may be a still image including a pictogram or a moving image, or may fade in or out within time. Further, the alerting B display may be accompanied by a sound or a warning sound.

  Here, the alerting B display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example of a warning B display after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The alert B display shown in FIG. 107 (1) displays a message “Let's be careful about the sinking”. Although the alert B display may be perceived as unpleasant for the player, the gaming machine 10 limits the posting timing of the alert B display to reduce the player's discomfort and alert effect. It is possible to achieve both improvement.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (2), the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning B display in parallel (for example, superposition) with the probability change explicit mode entry display. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can give the player interest in the alert B display by displaying the alert B display together with the guidance display for guiding the gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (3), the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning B display in parallel with the probability change explicit mode entry display (for example, window display).

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform the alert B display without performing the alert A display during the period from the timing T14 to the timing T16. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 may perform the alerting A display without performing the alerting B display between the timing T14 and the timing T16. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can achieve an alerting effect for either the alerting A display or the alerting B display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can secure a display time for either the alerting A display or the alerting B display, and achieve a further alerting effect. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may select either the alerting A display or the alerting B display based on a predetermined condition. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the alerting A display and the alerting B display in parallel between the timing T14 and the timing T16.

  “Ending 1” displays the probability change explicit mode from the timing T16 to the timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the warning B display. The probability change explicit mode display with a decorative symbol is a display indicating that the player enters the game mode that clearly indicates the probability variation state and that the symbol variation will be started soon.

  Here, the probability variation explicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a game mode effect display with a decorative symbol after the end of the hit according to the first embodiment. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (1) is a probability change explicit mode display in “Ending 1” and “Ending 2”. The probability variation explicit mode display includes a mode name and a decorative design in the probability variation explicit mode. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, for example, a symbol combination displayed at the time of the hit (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”).

  As described above, “Ending 1” is a period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms), a probability change explicit mode entry display, a company logo display, a warning A display, a warning B display, and a probability change explicit mode. Display.

  Further, the mode entry display is not limited to character information, and may be information displayed in association with the mode entry (probability change, time reduction, ordinary power support, etc.). The same applies to the continuous display of the mode. For example, the gaming machine 10 can use a specific character, background, symbol, or the like as a mode entry display or a mode continuation display. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 suggests the entry into the probability change explicit mode when displaying the character of the tiger 1 as the entry display of the mode, and enters the short time explicit mode when displaying the character of the tiger 2. When the character of the tiger 3 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the entry into the probability variation non-explicit mode. Such a gaming machine 10 can make the player intuitively feel the entry and continuation of the mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform an alert A display or an alert B display, or an alert A display and an alert B display at the same time as the mode entry display or the mode continuation display. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform efficient state notification and alerting within a limited ending time. For example, when the gaming machine 10 displays the lion 1 character in the probability change explicit mode entry display, it also displays the message “Be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or stealing it” (attention A display). Can do. Further, the gaming machine 10 can also display the message “Be careful with the sinking” (attention B display) when displaying the lion 2 character in the probability variation explicit mode continuous display. In addition, when displaying the Lion 3 character in the probability change explicit mode entry display, the gaming machine 10 also displays a message “Please be careful not to forget to take a prepaid card or steal it.” Can be displayed "(attention B display). Such a gaming machine 10 allows the player to intuitively feel the entry and continuation of the mode and can effectively call attention.

  Next, “Ending 2” will be described. “Ending 2” is an ending that is selected at the end of the hit when the hit is the second or later when the hit is continuous among the hits in which the gaming state has a probability variation after the end of the hit. For example, “Ending 2” is selected at the end of the hit when the hit that occurred in a gaming state with probability fluctuation or ordinary power support is a big hit 1 or a big hit 2.

  “Ending 2” performs a certain change explicit mode continuation display from timing T10 to timing T16 (for example, 22000 ms). The probability variation explicit mode continuation display is a display that indicates to the player that the game mode (probability variation explicit mode) that clearly indicates the probability variation state is continued. Probability change explicit mode continuation display is one form of guidance display which guides a game state advantageous to a player.

  Here, the probability variation explicit mode continuation display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (2) is a probability change explicit mode continuation display in “Ending 2”. The probability variation explicit mode continuation display includes a mode name in the certain variation explicit mode and a display “continuation” that clearly indicates the continuation of the certain variation explicit mode. The display “continuation” is an example of a display that clearly indicates the continuation of the probability change explicit mode, and may be a display “continue”, a display “nth (n is the number of continuations)”, or the like.

“Ending 2” performs the probability variation explicit mode display from timing T16 to timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the probability variation explicit mode continuous display.
In this way, “Ending 2” performs the probability variation explicit mode continuation display and the probability variation explicit mode display during the period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms). “Ending 2” does not perform the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display, thereby securing the effect display time allocated to the probability change explicit mode continuous display. “Ending 2” does not display the company logo, alert A display, and alert B display, but probabilistically displays the company logo, alert A display, and alert B display. It may be one that performs. “Ending 2” does not display the company logo, the alert A display, and the alert B display, but any of the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. May be performed selectively.

  “Ending 2” is set to a period in which the probability change explicit mode continuous display period (from timing T10 to timing T16) is equal to the period including the probability change explicit mode entry display, the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. Is done.

  Next, “Ending 3” will be described. “Ending 3” is an ending that is selected at the end of the hit when there is no probability variation after the end of hit, but the game is in a gaming state with ordinary power support. For example, “Ending 3” is selected at the end of the hit when the hit is a big hit 3.

  “Ending 3” performs a short time explicit mode entry display from timing T10 to timing T16 (for example, 22000 ms). The short time explicit mode entry display is a display that indicates to the player that the player has entered the game mode (the short time explicit mode) that clearly indicates that there is a general power support although there is no probability variation. The short time explicit mode entry display is a form of guidance display for guiding a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Here, the short time explicit mode entry display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (3) is the time-short explicit mode entry display in “Ending 3”. The short time explicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the short time explicit mode and a display “rush” that clearly indicates the entry into the short time explicit mode. Note that the display “rush” is an example of a display that clearly indicates the entry into the short time explicit mode, and may be a display “start” or the like.

  “Ending 3” displays the short time explicit mode from the timing T16 to the timing T17 (for example, 3000 ms) after the short time explicit mode entry display. Here, the short time explicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a time-short explicit mode display in “Ending 3”. The short time explicit mode display includes the mode name and the decorative design in the short time explicit mode. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, for example, the symbol combination displayed at the time of the hit (for example, “8”, “8”, “8”).

  In this way, “Ending 3” performs the time-short explicit mode entry display and the time-short explicit mode display in the period from timing T10 to timing T17 (for example, 25000 ms). Note that “Ending 3” does not perform the company logo display, the alerting A display, and the alerting B display, thereby securing the effect display time allocated to the short-time explicit mode entry display. “Ending 3” does not display the company logo, alert A display, and alert B display, but probabilistically displays the company logo, alert A display, and alert B display. It may be one that performs. “Ending 3” does not display the company logo, the alert A display, and the alert B display, but any of the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. May be performed selectively.

  “Ending 3” is set to a period in which the short time explicit mode entry display period (from timing T10 to timing T16) is equal to the period including the probability change explicit mode entry display, the company logo display, the alert A display, and the alert B display. Is done.

  Next, “Ending 4” will be described. “Ending 4” is an ending selected at the end of the hit when it is not clarified whether or not there is a probability variation after the hit. For example, “Ending 4” is selected at the end of the hit when the hit that occurred is 4 or big hit.

  “Ending 4” displays the probability change implicit mode entry display from timing T10 to timing T11 (for example, 7000 ms). The probability variation implicit mode entry display is a display that indicates to the player that the player has entered a game mode (probability variation implicit mode) that does not explicitly indicate the presence or absence of probability variation. The probability change non-explicit mode entry display is a form of guidance display for guiding a gaming state that may be advantageous to the player.

  Here, the probability variation implicit mode entry display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 104 (4) is a probability change non-explicit mode entry display in “ENDING 4”. The probability variation implicit mode entry display includes a mode name in the probability variation implicit mode and a display “rush” that clearly indicates entry into the probability variation implicit mode. The display “entry” is an example of a display that clearly indicates the entry into the probability variation non-explicit mode, and may be “display” or the like.

  “Ending 4” performs the probability variation implicit mode display from the timing T11 to the timing T12 (for example, 3000 ms) after the probability variation implicit mode entry display. Here, the probability variation implicit mode display will be described with reference to FIG. The effect display shown in FIG. 108 (3) is a probability variation non-explicit mode display in “Ending 4”. The probability variation implicit mode display includes a mode name and a decorative design in the probability variation implicit mode. The decorative symbol is a symbol combination displayed at the start of symbol variation, for example, a symbol combination displayed at the time of the hit (for example, “1”, “2”, “3”).

  Thus, “Ending 4” performs the probability variation implicit mode entry display and the probability variation implicit mode display during the period from timing T10 to timing T12 (for example, 10000 ms). “Ending 4” is set to a period in which the probability variation explicit mode entry display period (from timing T10 to timing T11) is shorter than the probability variation explicit mode entry display period (from timing T10 to timing T13). In addition, “Ending 4” is a period in which a period (timing T10 to timing T12) including the probability variation implicit mode entry display period and the probability variation implicit mode display period is shorter than the probability variation explicit mode entry display period (timing T10 to timing T13). Set to

  Note that “Ending 1” is displayed as the company logo, the alert A display, and the alert B display after the probability change explicit mode entry display, but the display order is an example and can be changed to an arbitrary order. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display order of the company logo display, the warning A display, and the warning B display based on predetermined conditions.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may not display the mode when displaying one or more of the company logo display, the alerting A display, and the alerting B display. That is, the gaming machine 10 can suggest a mode based on the presence / absence of the company logo display, the warning A display, the warning B display, and the display order. Such a gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest regarding the company logo display, the alerting A display, and the alerting B display, and can be expected to have a high advertising effect and an alerting effect.

  Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special drawing in the description of the control process of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for this production. (Decoration that is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a strand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the strand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of the CPU or the like so as to differ for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (eg, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (eg, an effect flag region (a storage region used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300). ) Save the initial value at power-on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process of performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are valid. Since the effect button does not turn on / off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process or within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of accepting operations such as setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

  [Step D21] The control unit performs a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing. If the frame switching timing, the control unit proceeds to Step D26, and if not the frame switching timing, waits for the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sync interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of the V blank interrupt is 1/60 seconds, for example, as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a period of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  Subsequent processing (step D26 to step D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed for each processing cycle at this frame switching timing by the frame switching timing determination processing. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effect is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen in accordance with the command set in Step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and responds to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of balls)). This is a process for effect mode correction.

  After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing from Step D18 to Step D30. That is, Step D18 to Step D30 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed at the above-described processing cycle after the production control device 300 is activated.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the presentation of the screen, but the signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processing. The process of actually outputting a drive control signal or the like to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, in the case where an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The received command (effect command) includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte). The effect command is sent from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Are sent sequentially. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a “command reception interrupt process” (not shown). In other words, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “storing” means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read out for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception number. The command reception counter is set in RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to “0” in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time corresponding to one cycle of the above-described processing cycle).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether the command reception number is “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D43, where the command reception number is “0”. If there is, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D41. The normal movement is “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D43. However, in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 receives a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without prohibiting interrupts, so the value of A may increase between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the processing in step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, processing for setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction processing “A−B” is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in the present embodiment, the interrupt is disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be “A ← 0”.

  [Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, sometimes simply referred to as a command buffer hereinafter) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a read pointer for the command buffer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31” Do it. The range from “0” to “31” here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not Steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data that has not yet been read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (address of data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis for the number of commands received is completed (that is, whether or not the steps D47 to D49 are repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the command for the number of received commands has not been analyzed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the MODE value is not within the normal range. Note that the MODE value may be a value that is not defined and is not used. If the MODE value is not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not in the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

  Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown). In step D53, the ACT value is separated into the upper and lower limits. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that it is within the normal range (at this time, the missing tooth check described later has not been performed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value with respect to the separated MODE value is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT value is the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. The coincidence check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination is performed including a missing tooth check that determines whether or not the ACT value is a normal ACT combination. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously, values that are missing). It is confirmed whether or not is a valid value. Since only the valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one whether it matches any of them.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

  Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is a fluctuation command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot effect, and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-related command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information related to a special symbol symbol (for example, what is to be a special symbol stop symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. . Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol command range. The control unit executes pre-read symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol system command range (step D64), and if the MODE data is not within the pre-read symbol system command range, step Proceed to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The control unit executes pre-reading fluctuation command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the pre-reading fluctuation command range (step D66). If the MODE data is not within the pre-reading fluctuation command range, step is executed. Proceed to D67. Note that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are commands for prefetch effects.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as a pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (a start winning memory is held or simply held) in which a special display variable display game is not executed. In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the game will be a big hit when it is executed afterwards, the start winning memory is displayed in a different manner than usual. Etc. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing the change pattern corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory to be prefetched and the stop symbol in advance. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

  [Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the special figure game system command range. The control unit executes special figure game type command processing when the MODE data is within the special figure game type command range (step D68), and receives the command when the MODE data is not within the special figure game type command range. End the analysis process. The special game command is a command related to the progress of the special game. For example, the special game commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a fanfare command, a big prize opening nth command, an interval command, an ending command, and the like. The special game command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special command game processing]
Next, the special figure game system command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a view illustrating a flowchart of special-figure game command processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The special game command processing is processing executed by the control unit in step D68 of the received command analysis processing.

  [Step D71] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is a customer waiting demo command. The control unit executes a customer waiting demo setting process when the MODE data is a customer waiting demo command (step D72), and proceeds to step D73 when the MODE data is not a customer waiting demo command. The customer waiting demonstration setting process is a process for setting the contents of the effect during the customer waiting demonstration.

  [Step D73] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is a fanfare command. The control unit executes a fanfare setting process when the MODE data is a fanfare command (step D74), and proceeds to step D75 when the MODE data is not a fanfare command. The fanfare setting process is a process for setting the content of the effect during the fanfare.

  [Step D75] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is the nth command for opening the big prize opening. The control unit executes the big prize opening nth setting process when the MODE data is the big prize opening nth command (step D76), and if the MODE data is not the big prize opening nth command, the step Proceed to D77. Note that the nth opening process of the big winning opening is a process of setting the contents of the effect during the nth opening of the big winning opening, that is, the round.

  [Step D77] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is an interval command. The control unit executes interval setting processing when the MODE data is an interval command (step D78), and proceeds to step D79 when the MODE data is not an interval command. Note that the interval setting process is a process of setting the contents of effects during the interval, that is, between rounds.

  [Step D79] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is an ending command. The control unit executes an ending setting process when the MODE data is an ending command (step D80), and ends the special game command processing when the MODE data is not an ending command. The ending setting process is a process for setting the contents of effects during ending, that is, the effects of ending 1 to ending 4 shown using FIG. The ending setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Ending setting process]
Next, the ending setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an ending setting process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The ending setting is a process executed by the control unit in step D80 of the special figure game command process.

  [Step D81] The control unit determines whether the ACTION data is ending 1 or not. The control unit executes an ending 1 setting process when the ACTION data is ending 1 (step D82), and proceeds to step D83 when the ACTION data is not ending 1. Note that the ending 1 setting process is a process for setting the production contents (see FIG. 103) during the ending 1.

  [Step D83] The control unit determines whether the ACTION data is ending 2. The control unit executes an ending 2 setting process when the ACTION data is ending 2 (step D84), and proceeds to step D85 when the ACTION data is not ending 2. Note that the ending 2 setting process is a process of setting the effect content (see FIG. 103) during the ending 2.

  [Step D85] The control unit determines whether the ACTION data is ending 3 or not. The control unit executes an ending 3 setting process when the ACTION data is ending 3 (step D86), and when the ACTION data is not ending 3, the control unit proceeds to step D87. Note that the ending 3 setting process is a process for setting the effect contents (see FIG. 103) during the ending 3.

  [Step D87] The control unit determines whether the ACTION data is ending 4 or not. The control unit executes the ending 4 setting process when the ACTION data is ending 4 (step D88), and ends the ending setting process when the ACTION data is not ending 4. Note that the ending 4 setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect during the ending 4 (see FIG. 103).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set the contents of the effect during the ending. Note that the gaming machine 10 sets the type of ending according to the ACTION data received from the game control device 100 by the effect control device 300. That is, the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not to include a warning display in the ending by the game control device 100, but the effect control device 300 may determine it. For example, the game control device 100 sets ending 1 and ending 2 as common ACTION data, and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to include a warning display in the ending based on a predetermined condition (for example, command reception history). It may be a thing.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit has a first hit (big hit 3) that becomes the first gaming state (low probability state) after the hit (big hit) operation ends, and a second advantage that is more advantageous than the first gaming state after the hit operation ends. A second hit (one big hit or two big hits) that becomes a gaming state (high probability state) can be generated. The control unit performs the first ending control when the second hit occurs in the first state (per first time), and performs the second hit in the second state (per continuous) different from the first state. When this occurs, the second ending control is performed. The first ending control includes a reminder about the game sinking in the second hit ending period. The second ending control does not include an alert regarding the game sinking in the second hit ending period.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a display device 41 that can display the progress of the game, and the control unit causes the display device 41 to display an alert regarding the infiltration of the game.
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) or (2) includes an audio output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the audio output device to output an alert regarding the infiltration of the game.

(4) In the second winning ending period, the control unit of (1) calls for attention regarding the intrusion of the game after guiding that the second gaming state is entered.
(5) During the second hit ending period, the control unit in (1) issues a warning regarding the intrusion of the game while guiding that the second gaming state is to be reached (superimposition of warning or alerting) Window display).

(6) The first ending control of (1) further includes a warning regarding forgetting to take a prepaid card in the second winning ending period.
(7) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a game control unit that comprehensively controls games and an effect control unit that performs effect control based on instructions from the game control unit.

(8) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), the effect control unit performs the first ending control and the second ending control based on the first state and the second state determined by the game control unit. .
(9) In the gaming machine 10 of (7), the effect control unit determines the first state and the second state, and performs the first ending control and the second ending control.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the player's game amount is evaluated to alert the player about the game turnover. In the first embodiment, regardless of the player's game amount, the ending 1 alerts about the game turnover. It is different from the embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 alerts on the display screen of the display device 41. First, a display screen without a warning display will be described with reference to FIG. 114, and then a display screen with a warning display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen without a warning display in the display device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with a warning display in the display device according to the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700 includes display contents including decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703, a hold-up display 704, a hold display 705, a special figure 1 hold number display 706, a special figure 2 hold number display 707, and a continuous game time. A display 708 is included. The display screen 700 indicates that the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703 are changing, and indicates that the corresponding special figure change display game is in the change display state. The reserved digest display 704 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the expectation for the game result by the display mode. According to the display mode, the hold display 705 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game and can notify the expectation for the game result for each hold memory. The special figure 1 hold number display 706 displays the reserved memory number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 707 displays the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game. The number of reserved memories displayed on the hold display 705 corresponds to the sum of the number of reserved memories displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display 706 and the number of reserved memories displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display 707. For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 706 displays “4” and the special figure 2 hold number display 707 displays “4”, the hold display 705 displays the number of hold memories by eight circular icons. Indicates “8”.

  The special figure 1 hold number display 706 and the special figure 2 hold number display 707 are displayed at positions that do not enter the player's blind spot even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. The number of reserved memories is clearly indicated to the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 always improves the degree of freedom of the display mode of the hold display 705 while ensuring that the number of hold memories is clearly indicated to the player.

  The continuous game time display 708 displays the time that the player is playing continuously. For example, the display screen 700 displays “55:00” as the continuous game time display 708, indicating that the player has played for 55 minutes continuously. Note that the continuous game time display 708 is an example of a game amount clarification function by the player, and is not limited to the game time. The number of game balls and the number of out-goes, the number of winning entries, the number of winning balls, etc. It may be a variable display count or an evaluation value calculated by one or two or more parameters.

  The display screen 700a includes, as display contents, decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703, a hold-up display 704, a hold-up display 705, a special figure 1 hold number display 706, a special figure 2 hold number display 707, and continuous game time. A display 708 and a warning display 709 are included. For example, the display screen 700a displays “60:00” as the continuous game time display 708, indicating that the player has played continuously for 60 minutes. The display screen 700a displays a warning display 709 when the continuous game time display 708 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 60 minutes). The attention display 709 includes contents for calling attention to excessive immersion in the game, and displays, for example, a message “Let's be careful about immersion”. Note that the message displayed by the alert display 709 is an example of an alert display, and may be, for example, detailed game guidance, a note, a pictogram, a moving image, or the like.

  The display screen 700a displays the alert display 709 among the display elements on the display screen 700a so that it is positioned in the foreground. For example, the display screen 700 a displays a warning display 709 so as to be superimposed on the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703. As a result, the gaming machine 10 ensures the effect of alerting the player by the alert display 709. Further, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the attention display 709 by superimposing the attention display 709 on the decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703 that the player observes with normal attention.

  Further, the display screen 700 a displays a warning display 709 at a position that does not hinder the visibility of the special figure 1 hold number display 706 and the special figure 2 hold number display 707. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 takes into consideration that the player does not suffer from the disadvantages of the game progress. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the display elements on the display screen 700a such as display elements (for example, decorative symbols 701, 702, and 703) that are actively overlapped and display elements that are allowed to overlap (for example, the reserved digest display 704). , Hold display 705) and display elements that are not allowed to overlap (for example, special figure 1 hold number display 706, special figure 2 hold number display 707). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can change the display position and size of the alert display 709 while simultaneously protecting the player's profit and improving the alert effect. By changing the display position and size of the alert display 709, the gaming machine 10 can further improve the alert effect.

  Note that the alert display 709 may be displayed within the range of the variable display period (until symbol determination), or may be displayed across a plurality of variable display periods. The alert display 709 may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or may not be displayed, or a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, touch non-detection or the selection button switch 25a, It may be displayed until the player detects an operation such as the determination button switch 25b. Note that the gaming machine 10 can detect that the player has confirmed the alert display by detecting the operation by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may add guidance for the confirmation operation to the display content in order to prompt the player to perform the confirmation operation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may give a privilege (for example, special voice output or display output) for the confirmation operation in order to further encourage the player to perform the confirmation operation.

[Warning process]
Next, the alerting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alerting process in the effect control device of the second embodiment. The attention calling process is a process for determining whether or not to display a warning display 709 on the display screen 700. The attention calling process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D91] The control unit acquires the alerting setting. As the alerting setting, a default setting is prepared in advance, but it may be updated by a game arcade or a player. For example, the control unit can update the alerting setting according to the input content received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. The alert setting includes a setting for enabling / disabling alert.

  [Step D92] The control unit refers to the alert setting and determines whether the alert is valid. A control part progresses to step D93, when alerting is effective. On the other hand, when the alerting is not valid, the control unit proceeds to step D91 and waits for the alerting to become effective.

  [Step D93] The control unit determines whether or not the start of the game by the player is detected. The control unit proceeds to step D94 when the game start is detected, and proceeds to step D91 when the game start is not detected. For example, the control unit can detect the start of the game by the player upon receiving a notification of touch detection from the game control device 100.

  [Step D94] The control unit initializes the game amount by the player. The game amount is an evaluation index of a player's degree of infiltration, and is, for example, a player's continuous game time. The control unit resets the continuous game time display 708 displayed on the display screen 700 to “0:00 (0 minutes)”.

  [Step D95] The control unit sets an alerting condition. The alerting condition is a condition for alerting. Note that the gaming machine 10 sets one alerting condition selected from a plurality of alerting conditions according to the setting condition, but may always set only one alerting condition.

  Here, the alerting condition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alert condition according to the second embodiment. There are three alerting conditions that can be set by the gaming machine 10. The alerting condition shown in (1) is an alerting condition that is selected in a state where no big hit has occurred since the power is turned on, and a condition for alerting when the continuous game time display 708 becomes 60 minutes, The message content is “Let's play moderate games”. The alert condition shown in (2) is an alert condition that is selected when the previous hit type is jackpot 1, jackpot 2, or jackpot 3, and the continuous game time display 708 is 60 minutes. Is the condition for alerting, and the message content is “Let's be careful about the sinking”. Further, the alert condition shown in (3) is an alert condition that is selected when the previous hit type is a big hit 4 or a small hit, and when the continuous game time display 708 is 60 minutes. As a condition for alerting, the message content is “Please take a break because it is not a good wave”.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set the alert condition and the message content according to the gaming state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can call attention with a timing and message in consideration of the state of the player.

  [Step D96] The control unit determines whether or not the player continues the game. The control unit proceeds to step D97 when it is determined that the player is continuing the game, and proceeds to step D91 when it is determined that the player is not continuing the game. For example, the control unit can detect the continuation of the game by the player in response to the touch detection notification from the game control device 100. In this way, the gaming machine 10 monitors the continuity of the game, and when the continuity of the game is lost, the gaming machine 10 considers that the player has taken a break or has changed.

[Step D97] The control unit updates the game amount by the player. For example, the control unit updates the continuous game time display 708 in accordance with the elapsed time from the game amount initialization.
[Step D98] The control unit determines whether an alerting condition is satisfied (for example, the game amount exceeds a predetermined threshold). When the alerting condition is not satisfied, the control unit proceeds to step D96 and waits for the alerting condition to be satisfied. On the other hand, a control part progresses to step D99, when alerting conditions are satisfied.

  [Step D99] The control unit sets a warning (flag) in response to the establishment of the warning condition. After setting the alerting, the control unit proceeds to step D91 and prepares for the next alerting.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may update the alerting setting at random in accordance with a predetermined event detection such as detection of power-on of the gaming machine 10 in step D91. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can set the alerting timing for the player to an unexpected timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can vary the alerting timing even when the gaming machine is of the same level when gaming machines of the same model are installed adjacent to each other.

  The gaming machine 10 detects the game start based on the touch detection in step D93, but detects the game start by a predetermined command (for example, a variable command or a hold command) received from the game control device 100. Also good. Further, the gaming machine 10 may detect the start of the game based on a player detection based on an output signal from an infrared sensor or a video signal captured by a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) camera.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the gaming amount initialized in step D94 as the gaming time, but is not limited to this as long as the gaming amount of the player can be evaluated. For example, the gaming machine 10 can use the variable display count, the number of bullets, the number of prize balls, a predetermined table value, etc. as the game amount. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 updates the game amount, the gaming machine 10 may weight the update value according to a predetermined condition. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set a game amount “10” for a game for 10 minutes in a game state without probability variation and a game amount “1” for a game for 10 minutes in a game state with probability variation. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player with a game amount in accordance with the player's actual feeling.

  Further, although the gaming machine 10 determines the continuation of the game based on the touch detection in step D96, the gaming machine 10 may detect the continuation of the game or the interruption of the game by a predetermined command (for example, a customer waiting command) received from the game control device 100. Good. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may detect a game interruption by regarding a predetermined game state (for example, a game state advantageous to a player such as a big hit, probability fluctuation, or general power support) as a game interruption. That is, the gaming machine 10 may set the game amount in a gaming state unfavorable for the player as a game amount update target. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can set which gaming state is advantageous / disadvantageous for the player in advance or by the game hall or the player.

  In addition, as an example of the establishment of the predetermined condition in step D98, the gaming machine 10 mentioned that the game amount exceeds a predetermined threshold value, but instead of this, a lottery determination in which the lottery probability varies depending on the game amount may be used. For example, the gaming machine 10 can determine that the alert condition is established with low probability when the game amount is small, and can determine that the alert condition is established with high probability when the game amount is large.

[Awareness edit processing]
Next, the alert editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alert editing process in the effect control device of the second embodiment. The alerting edit process is a process of updating the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alert (flag) set in the alerting process. The alert editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop from step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D101] The control unit determines whether or not an alert (flag) is set. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the alert (flag) is set, and ends the alert editing process when the alert (flag) is not set.

[Step D102] The control unit sets the position and size of a message window for displaying a message for calling attention.
[Step D103] The control unit acquires a message included in the alerting condition.

  [Step D104] The control unit updates the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) so as to display a message window for displaying a message for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  [Step D105] The control unit resets the alerting (flag) in response to the update of the effect display edit content. The control unit ends the alert editing process after resetting the alert.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include the alert display 709 on the display screen 700a. Note that the gaming machine 10 has updated the effect display edit content based on the alert (flag) set, but the effect display edit content is generated based on the alert (flag) set in the effect display editing process. May be.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The first modification of the second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in which the alerting display is displayed by superimposing the other display elements on the display screen 700a in that the alerting display is performed by replacing the display elements. To do.

  First, a warning display performed by replacing messages (including lines) displayed on the display screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with a warning display by message replacement in the display device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700b shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without an alert display. The display screen 700b includes a continuous game time display 708, a message display 710b, and a character display 711b as display contents. The display screen 700b displays a dialogue “chance?” (Message display 710b) in a message field (speech balloon) attached to a character such as a tiger (character display 711b).

  On the other hand, the display screen 700c shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display with a warning display. The display screen 700c follows the effect display edit contents updated by the alerting edit process for the effect display edit contents corresponding to the display screen 700b. The display screen 700c includes a continuous game time display 708, a warning display 709c, and a character display 711c as display contents. The display screen 700c displays a line “Be careful with the squeeze in” (attention display 709c) in a message field (speech balloon) accompanying a character like a lion (character display 711c).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert display by updating the message that is one of the display elements for the effect display edit content. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform alert display by updating a character that is one of the display elements with respect to the effect display edit content. In the display screen 700c, both the message and the character are updated on the display screen 700b and the alert display is performed. However, the display screen 700c may be either one. The gaming machine 10 may use a message or a character in a lively effect that is normally performed in the display effect (effect not related to the reliability notification of the special game), or a reach effect (related to the reliability notification of the special game). Message or character in the effect).

  Next, a warning display performed by replacing the background displayed on the display screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with a reminder display by background replacement in the display device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700d shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without an alert display. The display screen 700d includes a hold display 705, a continuous game time display 708, and a background display 712 as display contents. The display screen 700d displays a background (background display 712) including numbers (eg, “1”, “2”, “3”,...) Corresponding to each hold (hold display 705).

  On the other hand, the display screen 700e shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display with a warning display. The display screen 700e follows the effect display edit contents updated by the alerting edit process for the effect display edit contents corresponding to the display screen 700d. The display screen 700e includes a hold display 705e, a continuous game time display 708, and an alert display 709e as display contents. The display screen 700e displays a background (attention display 709e) including the message “attention to squeeze” instead of the number corresponding to each hold (hold display 705e). Further, the display screen 700e supports attention to the player's alert display 709e by changing the display mode of the hold display 705 to the display mode of the hold display 705e.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert display by updating the background, which is one of the display elements, with respect to the effect display edit content. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alert display by updating the hold display that is one of the display elements for the effect display edit content. In the display screen 700e, both the background and the hold display are updated on the display screen 700d and the alert display is performed. However, the display screen 700e may be either one. Further, the gaming machine 10 may link the pre-reading effect and change the display mode to the hold display 705e and display the alert display 709e. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can further support the player's attention to the alert display 709e.

[Awareness edit processing]
Next, the alert editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alert editing process in the effect control device according to the first modification of the second embodiment. The alerting edit process is a process of updating the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alert (flag) set in the alerting process. The alert editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop from step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D111] The control unit determines whether an alert (flag) is set. The controller proceeds to step D112 when the alert (flag) is set, and ends the alert editing process when the alert (flag) is not set.

  [Step D112] The control unit determines whether or not alerting is possible. The control unit proceeds to step D113 when alerting is possible, and ends the alert editing process when alerting is not possible. The control unit sets in advance a timing and a gaming state that can be alerted, or a timing and a gaming state that cannot be alerted, and determines whether or not it is possible to alert. For example, the normal gaming state is set as a state where alerting is possible, and the error state is set as a state where alerting is impossible. In addition, the timing when the update of the production display edit content is in time is set as a timing that can be alerted, and the timing when the update of the content display edit content is not in time is set as a timing that cannot be alerted. For example, the timing for determining whether or not the update of the effect display edit content is in time is set in advance for each variation pattern.

  [Step D113] The control unit selects a replacement item from the contents of the effect display edit. The replacement item is a display element in the display screen, and includes, for example, a background, a character, a message (line), a window, and the like. The replacement item is selected according to a predetermined selection rule.

  [Step D114] For the selected replacement item, the control unit selects replacement content that is a warning display. For example, when replacing the background A, the control unit selects one of the background B and the background C as options. The replacement content is selected according to a predetermined selection rule.

  [Step D115] The control unit updates the effect display editing content edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) with the selected replacement content for the selected replacement item.

  [Step D116] Upon receiving the update of the effect display edit content, the control unit resets the alert (flag). The control unit ends the alert editing process after resetting the alert.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include a warning display on the display screen. Note that the gaming machine 10 has updated the effect display edit content based on the alert (flag) set, but the effect display edit content is generated based on the alert (flag) set in the effect display editing process. May be.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described. The second modification of the second embodiment is the same as the first modification of the second embodiment in that the display element is replaced and a warning display is performed, but the second embodiment is limited in that the replacement target is limited. This is different from the first modification.

  First, a warning display performed by limiting replacement targets will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with a warning display by message replacement in the display device according to the second modification of the second embodiment.

  The display screen 700f shown in (1) is an example of a predetermined effect display without an alert display. The display screen 700f includes a continuous game time display 708, a message display 710f, and a character display 711f as display contents. The display screen 700f displays a dialogue “chance?” (Message display 710f) in a message field (speech balloon) attached to a character such as a tiger (character display 711f). Here, the line “chance?” Indicates that a notification of reliability (reliability notification) for which the result of symbol variation is a hit will be announced.

  The display screen 700g shown in (2) is an example of a predetermined effect display without the alert display displayed following the display screen 700f. The display screen 700g includes a continuous game time display 708, a message display 710g, and a character display 711g. The display screen 700g displays a dialogue “cold ...” (message display 710g) in a message field (speech balloon) attached to a character such as a pig (character display 711g).

  That is, the display screen 700g shows how the character display 711g responds to the call for the character display 711f on the display screen 700f. Here, the line “It's cold ...” indicates that the reliability of notification is low. The appearance of the character display 711g indicates that the reliability of notification is low.

  On the other hand, the display screen 700h shown in (3) is an example of a predetermined effect display without a warning display displayed following the display screen 700f. The display screen 700h includes a continuous game time display 708, a message display 710h, and a character display 711h as display contents. The display screen 700h displays a line “Hot !!!!” (message display 710h) in a message field (speech balloon) associated with a lion-like character (character display 711h).

  That is, the display screen 700h shows how the character display 711h responds to the call for the character display 711f on the display screen 700f. Here, the line “It's hot !!” indicates that the reliability of notification is high. The appearance of the character display 711h indicates that the reliability of notification is high.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 enhances the interest of the game by displaying the display screen 700g or the display screen 700h after displaying the display screen 700f. Normally, the gaming machine 10 can give a player a higher preference for the display screen 700h than the display screen 700g. Further, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a higher preference for the character display 711h than for the character display 711g.

  The display screen 700i shown in (4) follows the effect display edit content corresponding to the display screen 700h according to the effect display edit content updated by the alerting edit process. The display screen 700i includes a continuous game time display 708, a warning display 709i, and a character display 711h as display contents. The display screen 700i displays a line “Please be careful about the sinking” (attention display 709i) in a message field (speech balloon) accompanying a character like a lion (character display 711h).

  In other words, the display screen 700i replaces the line to which the character display 711h responds while using the character display 711h on the display screen 700h as it is. Here, the line “Please be careful about the sinking” indicates that the player should be alerted.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player the high reliability of alerting and alerting by replacing the lines to which the character display 711h responds while using the character display 711h as it is. it can. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can convert the negative emotion that the player may hold for the display of alerting into a positive emotion. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display with a high alerting effect. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display with a high alerting effect by updating a message, which is one of the display elements, with respect to the effect display edit contents in relation to the progress of the game.

  In addition, since the gaming machine 10 displays the line “Please be careful not to sink” (attention display 709i) as a response to the line “chance?” (Message display 710f), the notice of the warning display 709i is displayed on the message display 710f. A notification function can be provided. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the possibility that the player misses the alert display 709i, and can enhance the alert effect.

  Note that the message replacement in the alerting is an example of alerting notification, and other display elements such as a background or a character may be replaced, or a voice replacement or the like may be performed.

[Awareness edit processing]
Next, the alert editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alert editing process in the effect control device according to the second modification of the second embodiment. The alerting edit process is a process of updating the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display editing process (step D23 of the main process) based on the alert (flag) set in the alerting process. The alert editing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process in the loop from step D18 to step D30 of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D121] The control unit determines whether an alert (flag) is set. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when the alert (flag) is set, and ends the alert editing process when the alert (flag) is not set.

[Step D122] The control unit obtains the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display edit process (step D23 of the main process).
[Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not there is a specific effect (specific effect) in the acquired effect display edit content. A control part progresses to step D124, when there exists a specific effect in content display edit content, and complete | finishes an alerting edit process, when there is no specific effect. The specific effect is an effect related to reliability notification, and corresponds to, for example, the line “Hot !!!!” (message display 710h) on the display screen 700h. Note that whether or not the effect included in the effect display edit content is a specific effect is set in advance for each effect.

  [Step D124] The control unit selects replacement content (attention display) corresponding to the specific effect. For example, when replacing the line “Let's be hot !!” (message display 710h), the control unit selects the line “Be careful about the sinking” (attention display 709i).

[Step D125] The control unit updates the effect display edit contents edited in the effect display edit process (step D23 of the main process) with the selected replacement content.
[Step D126] Upon receiving the update of the effect display edit content, the control unit resets the alert (flag). The control unit ends the alert editing process after resetting the alert.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can include a warning display on the display screen. Note that the gaming machine 10 has updated the effect display edit content based on the alert (flag) set, but the effect display edit content is generated based on the alert (flag) set in the effect display editing process. May be.

  Next, the specific effects to be replaced and the contents of replacement will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of the specific effects to be replaced and the contents of replacement in Modification 2 of the second embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 has some specific effects to be replaced. A specific effect is prepared for each replacement item. For example, the replacement item cut-in is displayed on the screen that is inserted (cut-in) into the display screen, and displays the line “Intense heat !!”. The line “Super heat !!!!” is a replacement object, and is replaced by the alert display “Let's watch out for the sinking !!”. In addition, the replacement item line displays a line “Hot !!!!” on the display screen. The line “Hot !!!!” is the target of replacement, and is replaced by the alert display “Be careful of the sinking”.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 replaces the specific effect included in the effect display edit content with the replacement content. The gaming machine 10 provides the same effect as that in which the high reliability is set in the alert display by using the specific effect in which the high reliability is set as the replacement target. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the alert display. For example, even if the gaming machine 10 does not perform a warning display, the player normally expects the appearance of a warning display. Therefore, such a gaming machine 10 has a very high alerting effect.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described. Modified example 3 of the second embodiment is different from modified example 1 of the second embodiment in which the generated display display editing content is updated in that a warning display is included when generating the generated display editing content.

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 replaces the edit item options used when generating the effect display edit content. Here, FIG. 125 shows the edit item options in a state where the alert (flag) is not set (at the time of alert reset) and the edit item options in the state where the alert (flag) is set (when the alert is set). It explains using. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of the edit item option at the time of alert reset and the edit item option at the time of alert set according to the third modification of the second embodiment.

  The edit item option at the time of resetting the alert shown in (1) is an option for the content of the cut-in that is one of the edit items in the effect display edit content, and corresponds to a specific variation pattern at the time of resetting the alert. To do. The edit item choices at the time of alert reset include “−”, “Chance!”, “Great Chance!”, And “Intense Heat !!” in order from the lowest reliability. That is, at the time of alert resetting, the gaming machine 10 has the lowest reliability for the cut-in “−” and the highest reliability for the cut-in “Furious” !!

  The edit item choice at the time of the alert set shown in (2) is an option for the effect content for the cut-in that is one of the edit items in the effect display edit content, and corresponds to a specific variation pattern at the time of the alert set. To do. The edit item choices for the attention set include “−”, “Chance!”, “Large chance !!”, and “Let's be careful about the sinking !!” in order of increasing reliability. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the lowest reliability of the cut-in “-” and the highest reliability of the cut-in “Let's be careful about the sinking !!” at the time of the alerting reset.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing amount for performing the alert display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has fewer restrictions on processing time and processing timing compared to the case of updating the production display edit content after generation.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modifications 1 to 3) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit detects the player's continuous game, and the game amount (game time, number of ball of game ball, number of out-going ball entering, winning port winning number, winning ball number, out port in continuous gaming Notes on the number of balls entered and the number of balls received, the number of display variations, an evaluation value calculated by one or more parameters, etc.) and the amount of game play exceeds the predetermined threshold Arouse.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) changes the threshold according to predetermined conditions (such as gaming state, gaming machine performance, setting change, etc.).
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a display device 41, and the control unit performs a warning display from the display device 41.

(4) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit performs a warning display overlapping the identification information.
(5) The display device 41 of (3) or (4) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner. A reminder is displayed as far as it is possible.

  (6) The control unit of any one of (3) to (5) is configured to display a plurality of display elements displayed on the display device 41, a display element that overlaps the alert display during the display of the alert display, and an alert display. It includes a display element that does not overlap the alert display during display.

(7) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit performs a warning display within the range of one variable display. .
(8) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit displays a warning display over two or more variable displays. Do it.

  (9) The control unit (3) displays a warning until a predetermined condition (a preset display time, detection of game interruption by the player, acceptance of confirmation operation by the player, transition of game state, etc.) is established.

(10) The control unit in (3) displays an alert until the confirmation operation is accepted by the player, and gives a privilege (special audio output, display output, etc.) to the player based on the confirmation operation acceptance.
(11) When the control unit of (1) detects a game interruption of the player (touch detection, timer monitoring, etc.), it is assumed that the continuity of the game is interrupted.

(12) The control unit (1) can change the alert conditions (continuous game determination conditions, threshold, alert time, presence / absence of alert, etc.) based on the game state.
(13) The control unit of (1) can change the alert mode (display only, audio only, display and audio combination, alert time, alert content, etc.) based on the gaming state.

(14) The control unit of (1) can change the alert mode (display only, voice only, display and voice combination, alert time, alert content, etc.) based on the gaming state.
(15) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit is related to the reliability notification displayed in the variable display game. Of the display elements that are not related to the reliability notification, display a warning display in relation to the display elements that are not related to the reliability notification (for example, replacement to a background display including a warning display or a warning display) Replacement to lively production including).

  (16) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols and the like) in a variable manner, and the control unit is related to the reliability notification displayed in the variable display game. Of the display elements not related to the notification of reliability and the notification of reliability, the warning display is performed in relation to the display elements related to the notification of reliability (for example, from the cut-in including the reliability notification to the cut-in including the warning display). Or replacement from a message containing a reliability notification to a message containing a warning display).

  (17) The control unit of (16) excludes the first display element related to the reliability notification from the replacement target of the reliability notification display, and sets the second display element related to the reliability notification to the reliability notification display. It is set as a replacement target (for example, replacement of words to which the character display 711h responds while using the character display 711h on the display screen 700h as it is).

(18) The control unit (1) has a notice notification function for alerting (for example, displaying the alert display 709i as a response to the message display 710f).
(19) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit can perform a specific effect in which high reliability is set in the variable display game. Is replaced with a notice.

  (20) The display device 41 of (3) can display a variable display game that displays the identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) in a variable manner, and the control unit includes a warning in the options when no warning is given. When an effect is selected from the first effect options that are not present, and an alert is made, an effect is selected from the second effect options that include an alert in the option.

(21) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes an audio output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the audio output device to output an alert regarding the infiltration of the game.
[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that a warning display is performed based on an operation of the option setting unit 25. Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or PB (Push Button).

  First, connection between the presentation control device 300 of the third embodiment and the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating a connection example of the presentation control device and the push button according to the third embodiment.

  The push button 25 includes a push button LED 25c, a touch sensor 25d, and a push button SW25e. The push button LED 25c is a nine-color full-color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. The push button SW25e can detect a pressing operation of the push button 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED 25c to the push button 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW25e from the push button 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal from the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal from the push button SW25e. For example, the state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b.

  Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button according to the third embodiment.

  The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the rough shape of the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circular portions 250 to 258 that are about the size of a fingertip on the upper surface thereof, the small circular portion 250 is disposed at the center of the upper surface, and 8 on the circumference surrounding the small circular portion 250. Two small circle parts 251 to 258 are arranged.

  The small circle portion 250 arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 251 is located to the left of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) within the circumference. The small circle part 252 is located in the diagonally upper left direction of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) within the circumference. The small circle portion 253 is positioned above the small circle portion 250 and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 254 is located in the diagonally upper right direction of the small circle part 250, and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW5) in the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW6) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 256 is positioned obliquely downward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 257 is positioned below the small circle portion 250 and arranges one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW8) in the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located in the diagonally lower left direction of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c is arranged in the circumference thereof. Since the small circle part 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, the small circle part 258 has a star-shaped polygonal design so that it can be easily distinguished from the small circle parts 250 to 257 where the touch sensor 25d is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. When the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle portion 258 is located on the left side of the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. This makes it easy for the player to handle the small circle portion 258 as the home position.

  In the push button 25, the touch sensor 25d is not disposed in the small circle portion 258, but the touch sensor 25d may be disposed in the same manner as the small circle portions 250 to 257. Further, the push button 25 may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the player's touch operation instead of the touch sensor 25d. In that case, the effect control apparatus 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

  Next, a display screen at the time of option setting according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a display screen at the time of option setting according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 2) of a display screen at the time of option setting according to the third embodiment.

  The display screen 720 shown in (1) is one of the customer waiting screens. The display screen 720 includes a customer waiting display 721 and a setting operation guidance display 722. The display screen 720 superimposes the setting operation guidance display 722 on the customer waiting display 721 periodically or irregularly while displaying the customer waiting display 721 waiting for the player to start the game while displaying a moving image or a still image. The setting operation guidance display 722 is an operation guidance display relating to option setting, and displays an image of the push button 25 and an operation description. The gaming machine 10 shifts to a state where options can be set by accepting an operation of the push button 25 while the customer waiting screen is displayed.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can accept a player's operation by an input from the push button SW25e or the touch sensor 25d on the push button 25 or a combination input of the push button SW25e and the touch sensor 25d. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform operation guidance display for the player by the light emission mode of the push button LED 25c, and can change the light emission mode of the push button LED 25c in accordance with the player's operation and notify the operation result.

  The display screen 720a shown in (2) is inserted when the customer waiting screen is switched to the option setting screen. Display screen 720a includes a reminder display 723. The alert display 723 displays a message with a large font “Let's be careful about the sinking” and detailed precautions with a small font. The gaming machine 10 can alert the player in a cool state before starting the game or interrupting the game by setting the posting timing of the alert display 723 as the option setting timing. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player in a state in which the player easily accepts the alerting, and can achieve both reduction of the discomfort of the player and improvement of the alerting effect.

  A display screen 720b shown in (3) is one of option setting screens. The display screen 720b includes an option setting display 724, a volume setting display 725, a brightness setting display 726, a return display 727, and a setting operation guidance display 722a. The option setting display 724 clearly indicates that an option can be set. The volume setting display 725 specifies the range in which the output volume of the speakers 19a and 19b can be set and the current set value. Note that the gaming machine 10 outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b at an output volume corresponding to the setting operation, so that the player can easily confirm the setting contents. The brightness setting display 726 clearly indicates the range in which the brightness of the display device 41, LED, lamp, etc. can be set and the current set value. Note that the gaming machine 10 adjusts the light amounts of the display device 41, the LED, the lamp, and the like with brightness according to the setting operation so that the player can easily confirm the setting contents. A return display 727 guides the return from the option setting screen to the customer waiting screen. The setting operation guidance display 722a displays the operation guidance on the option setting screen.

  A display screen 720c shown in (4) is one of option setting confirmation screens. After accepting the setting end operation on the option setting screen, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen 720c for allowing the player to confirm the setting contents. Display screen 720c includes an option setting confirmation display 724a, a volume setting confirmation display 725a, and a brightness setting confirmation display 726a. The option setting confirmation display 724a clearly indicates the option setting value. The volume setting confirmation display 725a clearly indicates the setting value of the volume setting. The brightness setting confirmation display 726a clearly indicates the setting value of the brightness setting.

  The display screen 720d shown in (5) is inserted when the option setting screen is switched to the customer waiting screen. The display screen 720d includes a warning display 723a. The alert display 723a displays a message with a large font “Let's be careful about the sinking”. The gaming machine 10 can alert the player in a cool state before starting the game or by suspending the game by setting the posting timing of the alert display 723a to the timing after the option setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can alert the player in a state in which the player easily accepts the alerting, and can achieve both reduction of the discomfort of the player and improvement of the alerting effect.

  The display screen 720e shown in (6) is one of the customer waiting screens. The display screen 720e includes a customer waiting display 721. The display screen 720e displays a customer waiting display 721 that waits for the player to start playing while displaying moving images and still images. The setting operation guidance display 722 is not superimposed on the display screen 720e immediately after switching from the option setting screen.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 720d after the option setting confirmation display 724a, but may display the display screen 720d when returning to the previous screen (for example, the customer waiting screen) on the display screen 720b. That is, the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning display at one or more transition timings when a display screen related to option setting transitions. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform a warning display on one or more display screens among a plurality of display screens related to option setting (for example, option setting display 724, 724a). In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the display as long as it is the timing described above, and may be an alert by voice.

  Note that, when there is a start prize during option setting, the gaming machine 10 gives priority to the variable display game in the display on the display device 41 and cancels the option setting. Next, the display of the display device during option setting and the sound output will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example of display and audio output of the display device during option setting according to the third embodiment.

  First, the display on the display device 41 and the audio output when there is no start prize during option setting will be described. The gaming machine 10 displays a setting screen (for example, a display screen 720b) on the display device 41 during option setting. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs BGM (BackGround Music) at the time of setting from the speakers 19a and 19b. When option setting ends at timing T22, the gaming machine 10 displays a warning screen (for example, display screen 720d) from timing T22 to timing T24. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs a warning sound (for example, announcement or chime) from the speakers 19a and 19b. The gaming machine 10 displays a customer waiting screen (for example, the display screen 720e) on the display device 41 after the timing T24. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs the customer waiting BGM from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  Next, the display on the display device 41 and the audio output when there is a start prize during option setting will be described. The gaming machine 10 displays a setting screen (for example, a display screen 720b) on the display device 41 during option setting. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs the BGM at the time of setting from the speakers 19a and 19b. If there is a start prize at timing T21 earlier than the attention screen switching timing (timing T22), the gaming machine 10 displays a variation display screen from timing T21. At this time, the gaming machine 10 outputs a warning sound (for example, “please pay attention to the sinking”) without immediately outputting the fluctuation display BGM from the speakers 19a and 19b. The gaming machine 10 outputs the fluctuation display BGM from the timing T23 when the alerting sound is finished being output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  Thus, even if the gaming machine 10 loses the timing for performing the alert display when there is a start prize during option setting, it can alert the user by voice output. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the progress of the variable display game on the display device 41 even if there is such an alert. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both progress of the variable display game and alerting.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described. Modification 1 of the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that a warning display is performed on the option setting screen. The alert display on the option setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with a warning display when an option is set in the display device according to the first modification of the third embodiment.

  A display screen 720f shown in (1) is one of option setting screens. The display screen 720f includes an option setting display 724f, a volume setting display 725f, a brightness setting display 726f, a warning display 723f, a return display 727, and a setting operation guidance display 722. The option setting display 724f displays the volume setting display 725f, the brightness setting display 726f, and the alert display 723f as menus, and clearly indicates that the option setting is possible. The menu display includes a volume setting display 725f and a brightness setting display 726f as items that can be set as options, and a warning display 723f that is not an item that can be set as options. The display screen 720f highlights the selected setting item more than the setting item that is not selected. For example, the display screen 720f clearly indicates that the sound volume setting is being selected and the brightness setting is not selected by highlighting the sound volume setting display 725f and non-highlighting display of the brightness setting display 726f.

  The gaming machine 10 can cyclically select options included in the menu display, and updates the options based on the operation of the push button 25. The display screen 720g shown in (2) shows a state where one option has been updated by the push button 25. The display screen 720g clearly indicates that the brightness setting is being selected and the volume setting is not selected by highlighting the brightness setting display 726g and non-emphasizing the volume setting display 725g.

  When the gaming machine 10 further updates the option based on the operation of the push button 25, the gaming machine 10 updates the display screen 720g to the display screen 720h shown in (3). The display screen 720h enlarges (highlights) the alert display 723h and clearly indicates that neither brightness setting nor volume setting is selected. The display screen 720h may display a warning display 723 for performing detailed warning instead of the warning display 723h. The gaming machine 10 may give a privilege (for example, a special effect display or voice output) to the player who has confirmed such detailed alerting. Such a gaming machine 10 can give the player a positive motivation for alert confirmation.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 alerts at the time of option setting and changes the display mode of the alert display by the player operation (change from the alert display 723f, 723g to the alert display 723h), Get a greater alerting effect.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described. Modification 2 of the third embodiment is different from Modification 1 of the third embodiment in that attention is set on the option setting screen. The alert setting on the option setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen with an alerting setting at the time of option setting in the display device according to the second modification of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 can cyclically select options included in the menu display, and updates the options based on the operation of the push button 25. The menu display includes a volume setting display 725i, a brightness setting display 726i, and an alert setting display 728 as items that can be set as options.

  The display screen 720i indicates that the alert setting is being selected and the volume setting and the brightness setting are not selected. The highlighted display of the alert setting display 728, the volume setting display 725i, and the brightness setting display 726i are not highlighted. This is indicated by the display.

  The alerting setting display 728 can set the level of alerting (for example, 10 levels from gentle to severe) regarding the alerting of intrusion. Note that the alerting setting display 728 may be able to set presence / absence of alerting, and may be able to set other settings related to alerting such as the frequency of alerting. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 allows the player to change the setting in multiple steps, the gaming machine 10 may limit the setting range to a range permitted by the game hall. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the multi-stage setting change according to the output of the RTC 338. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the setting range between morning and afternoon, or depending on the day of the week.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. In the third modification of the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 performs alerting notification instead of the welcome message. The welcome message is a message in which the gaming machine 10 detects the player's game start from the touch switch signal and outputs a voice.

[Welcome message setting process]
First, the welcome message setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a view illustrating a flowchart of welcome message setting processing in the effect control device of Modification 3 of the third embodiment. The welcome message setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The welcome message setting process is executed based on the fact that the effect control device 300 receives a single-shot command (touch switch ON) from the game control device 100.

  [Step D131] The control unit determines whether there is an alerting setting, that is, whether the alerting notification is valid. The control unit proceeds to step D136 when there is an alerting setting, and proceeds to step D132 when there is no alerting setting.

  [Step D132] Since there is no alerting setting, the control unit performs a random number lottery in order to output any welcome message of pattern 1 to pattern 3 that does not alert. The welcome messages from Pattern 1 to Pattern 3 and from Pattern 4 to Pattern 6 described later will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit proceeds to step D133 when the extracted random value is in the range A, proceeds to step D134 when the extracted random value is in the range B, and proceeds to step D135 when the extracted random value is in the range C. move on.

[Step D133] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 1 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D134] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 2 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.

[Step D135] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 3 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D136] The control unit refers to the alert level in the alert setting (for example, the degree of alert described in the second modification of the third embodiment). There are 10 levels of alerting levels from 1 to 10, and the control unit proceeds to step D137 when the alerting level is from 1 to 4, and proceeds to step D138 when the alerting level is from 5 to 7. When the level is 8 to 10, the process proceeds to Step D139.

[Step D137] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 4 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
[Step D138] The control unit sets a welcome message of pattern 5 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.

[Step D139] The control unit sets the welcome message of pattern 6 as the effect editing content, and ends the welcome message setting process.
Next, welcome messages from pattern 1 to pattern 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of a welcome message according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment.

  The welcome message in the gaming machine 10 includes a pattern 1 to pattern 3 welcome message that is randomly selected when there is no alerting setting, and a pattern 4 to pattern that is selected according to the alerting level when there is an alerting setting. Includes 6 welcome messages.

  The welcome message of pattern 1 utters the line “Good luck” with the voice of character A. The welcome message of pattern 2 emits a dialogue “fight” with the voice of character B. The welcome message of pattern 3 utters the line “Must win!” With the voice of character C. Thus, when the gaming machine 10 detects the game start of the player, the gaming machine 10 issues various welcome messages to improve the interest.

  The welcome message of pattern 4 is a welcome message that is selected when the alerting level is 1 to 4, and the character A's voice utters the line “Beware of the sinking”. The welcome message of pattern 5 is a welcome message that is selected when the alerting level is 5 to 7, and a speech “let's watch out for the sinking” is issued by the voice of character B. The welcome message of pattern 6 is a welcome message that is selected when the alerting level is 8 to 10, and the speech of the character C is uttered with the words “Watch out for the sinking”. Thus, the gaming machine 10 alerts the player by issuing a welcome message corresponding to the alerting level when detecting the player's game start.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. The modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment provides a privilege to a player according to the presence or absence of alerting setting. The privilege that the gaming machine 10 gives to the player will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example of a privilege granted to a player by the gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a variety of game effects by displaying and sounding a plurality of characters in the game effects. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform reliability notification by the character used for the game effect by associating each character with the reliability of the variation display game with respect to the derivation result mode.

  The gaming machine 10 selects a character to be used for the game effect when there is no alerting setting from (1) the effect options when there is no alerting setting. That is, the gaming machine 10 can select four types of characters A, B, C, and D when there is no alerting setting, and four stages corresponding to the characters A, B, C, and D, or these Multi-level reliability notification by combination can be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 selects a character to be used for a game effect when there is an alerting setting from (2) effect options when there is an alerting setting. That is, the gaming machine 10 can select six types of characters A, B, C, D, E, and F when the alerting setting is made, and the characters A, B, C, D, E, and F can be selected. Corresponding six levels, or multi-level reliability notifications by combinations thereof can be performed.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can give a privilege (for example, diversity of game effects, detailed reliability notification, etc.) to the player by alerting setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be motivated to perform alerting settings for the player.

In addition, the privilege illustrated is an example, Comprising: The game machine 10 may expand the diversity of other game productions, such as a background display, an audio | voice, and BGM.
[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, alerting is secured at least every certain time in a continuous game.

[Warning process]
The alerting process that ensures alerting at regular intervals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alerting process in the effect control device according to Modification 5 of the third embodiment. The attention calling process is a process for determining whether or not to call attention. The attention calling process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D141] The control unit clears the monitoring timer. The monitoring timer is a timer for ensuring alerting at regular intervals. For example, “60 minutes” is set as the time-up time.

  [Step D142] The control unit determines whether or not a continuous game is being played. For example, the control unit can determine whether or not a continuous game is in progress based on a touch state notified from the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D143 when the continuous game is being played, and proceeds to step D141 when the continuous game is not being played. That is, the control unit resets the monitoring timer when the continuous game is interrupted (clears the monitoring timer in step D141).

  [Step D143] The control unit determines whether or not the monitoring timer has expired. The control unit proceeds to step D145 when the monitoring timer expires, and proceeds to step D144 when the monitoring timer does not expire.

  [Step D144] The control unit determines whether a monitoring event is detected. The control unit proceeds to step D145 when a monitoring event is detected, and proceeds to step D142 when a monitoring event is not detected. A monitoring event is an event that triggers an alerting set. For example, the monitoring event includes an alert notification by updating a game effect, an alert notification at the time of option setting, and the like.

  [Step D145] The control unit sets an alert (flag) in response to establishment of the alert condition (time-up of the monitor timer or detection of a monitor event). After setting the alert, the control unit proceeds to step D141 and prepares for the next alert.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure alerting at least every predetermined time in the continuous game.
[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Modification 6 of the third embodiment changes the alerting mode when repeatedly alerting in a continuous game.

  The alerting process that ensures alerting at regular intervals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alerting mode according to the number of alerting repetitions according to Modification 6 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 changes the alerting mode when continuously alerting the continuous game without interruption. The gaming machine 10 selects pattern 1 alert in the first (first) alert, selects pattern 2 alert in the second alert, and patterns 3 alert in the third and subsequent alerts. Select.

  The alert of pattern 1 displays the message “Let's enjoy a moderate game”. The alert for pattern 2 displays the message “Let's take a break moderately”. The alert for pattern 3 displays the message “Please be careful about the sinking”.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate alerting according to the game tendency of the player by changing the alerting mode when repeatedly alerting. Note that the gaming machine 10 may expand the alerting time (for example, change from 3 seconds to 10 seconds) when repeatedly alerting in a continuous game. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the alerting conditions (for example, alerting frequency and alerting interval) when continuous alerting is performed without interruption of the continuous game. Further, the gaming machine 10 reduces the variety of game effects (for example, the reduction of the number of characters used for the game effects, the reduction of the stage that can be transferred, the sound output, etc.) OFF, reduction of the maximum volume, reduction of the maximum light quantity of the LED and the light, etc.).

[Modification 7 of the third embodiment]
In Modification 7 of the third embodiment, alerting is performed in response to a game effect intervention by a player.

  The alerting triggered by the detection of the game effect intervention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example of alerting triggered by detection of a game effect intervention according to Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

  The display screen 730 shown in (1) is one of the variable display screens. The display screen 730 displays a message (message “Press!”) 731 and an image 732 of the push button 25 as operation guidance of the push button 25. Thereby, the display screen 730 prompts the player to operate the push button 25 as part of the game effect. The operation of the push button 25 by the player is a form of game effect intervention by the player.

  The display screen 730a shown in (2) is a display screen after the gaming machine 10 receives an operation of the push button 25. The display screen 730a includes a warning display 733. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can call attention with the opportunity of the game production intervention by the player. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 changes the progress of the game production in response to the game production intervention by the player, when the game production with low reliability and the game production with high reliability are options, the reliability is high. A high game effect may be used as the alert display 733.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can convert the negative emotion that the player may hold for the display of alerting into a positive emotion. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display with a high alerting effect.

[Variation 8 of Third Embodiment]
In Modification 8 of the third embodiment, attention is given by background scroll display.
The alerting by the background scroll display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of the background scroll display according to the modification 8 of the third embodiment.

  The background scroll display 740 shown in (1) is scroll-displayed from the front end position S to the end position E1 as a background on the variable display screen when the gaming machine 10 performs a warning display. The background scroll display 740 scrolls rightward in the figure as the background display of the display screen. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays a part of the background scroll display 740 as the background of the display screen 741. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can display the message “Let's watch out for the sink!” On the background scroll display 740 and alert the player.

  The background scroll display 740a shown in (2) not only alerts the player but also notifies the reliability. The background scroll display 740a is scroll-displayed as a background from the front end position S to the end position E2 as a background on the variable display screen when the gaming machine 10 performs a warning display. The intermediate position M corresponds to the end position E1 of the background scroll display 740, and the background scroll display 740a can perform scroll display similar to the background scroll display 740 by scroll display from the tip position S to the intermediate position M. . The background scroll display 740a can display a message “Let's watch out for incline!” By a scroll display from the tip position S to the intermediate position M, and can alert the player. In addition, the background scroll display 740a performs reliability notification (message “but even before that! Chance!”) By scrolling from the intermediate position M to the end position E2.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays a part of the background scroll display 740 as the background of the display screen 741a. The display screen 741a alerts in the range from the tip position S to the intermediate position M, and the intermediate position M To the end position E2.

  The gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation for the reliability notification after the alert display by selectively using the background scroll display 740 and the background scroll display 740a when performing the alert. Such a gaming machine 10 can be expected to have a high effect of drawing attention to the attention display to the player.

  Note that the background scroll display 740a is not limited to the reliability notification (message “but before that, a chance!”), But may employ various options such as reliability notification (message “Burning !!!!”). Good.

  Moreover, although the gaming machine 10 tried to perform the alert display and the reliability notification by the background scroll displays 740 and 740a, it can be applied to a game effect in which the alert and the reliability notification are arranged in time series. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform message scrolling in a message window, voice alert notification, and the like instead of the alert display and reliability notification by the background scroll displays 740 and 740a.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may have a cancel function for canceling (not displaying) the alert display being displayed by operating the push button 25 or the like. Such a cancel function is frequently used by a player and may damage the alert function. However, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to suppress the use of the cancel function by arranging the alerting and the reliability notification in chronological order, and can suppress the reduction of the alerting effect.

[Variation 9 of the third embodiment]
Modification 9 of the third embodiment performs alerting setting based on a self-diagnosis. The self-diagnosis will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for the self-diagnosis of the ninth modification of the third embodiment.

  The display screen 750 is a display screen for performing a self-diagnosis. For example, the gaming machine 10 provides a self-diagnosis for the menu at the time of option setting, and displays the display screen 750 when the self-diagnosis function is selected from the menu.

  Display screen 750 includes self-diagnosis display 751 and operation guidance display 752. The self-diagnosis display 751 displays questions and answer options in the self-diagnosis. For example, the self-diagnosis display 751 displays 10-level answer options from “I don't think so” to “I think so”, asking the question “I'll hit it until I get lost”.

  The gaming machine 10 accepts an answer from the player according to the operation guidance display 752, and performs alerting setting. For example, the gaming machine 10 is more likely to alert the player who answered “I think so” than the player who answered “I don't think so” to the question “I will hit it until I get lost”. Set up the arousal. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform the alerting setting corresponding to the player's answer by associating the setting contents with the answer pattern in advance. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting along the game trend of the player.

  Note that the self-diagnosis is a form of the player's game trend detection function, and the gaming machine 10 is based on the operation status of the push button 25 (for example, other input information such as frequency and strength of pressing operation). The game trend of the player may be detected.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modifications 1 to 9) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a reception unit (for example, a push button 25) and a control unit (the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300). The accepting unit accepts an operation that does not affect the game result (for example, a game effect intervention operation or a setting operation). The control unit alerts the player about the game ingestion based on the operation received by the receiving unit.

(2) The control unit in (1) calls attention regarding the infiltration of the game based on the setting operation (for example, volume setting, brightness setting) related to the effect of the gaming machine 10.
(3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes a display device 41, and the control unit displays the setting from the customer waiting display when a setting operation is accepted while the display device 41 is performing the customer waiting display. When switching to, alerts about game infiltration.

  (4) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes a display device 41, and the control unit changes from the setting display to the customer waiting display when a return operation is accepted while the setting display is being performed on the display device 41. At the time of switching, alerts regarding game infiltration.

(5) The control unit (3) or (4) displays a warning display on the display device 41.
(6) The gaming machine 10 of (3) or (4) includes an audio output device (speakers 19a and 19b), and the control unit causes the audio output device to output an alert regarding the infiltration of the game.

  (7) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes an audio output device (speakers 19a and 19b), the display device 41 can display a variable display game, and the control unit can display the variable display game during the setting display. When is started, the setting display is switched to the display related to the variable display game, and the alert regarding the game sinking is output from the audio output device.

(8) The gaming machine 10 of (2) includes a display device 41, and the control unit displays a setting item on the display device 41 as a menu, and the menu display includes an item whose setting can be changed and a warning display. .
(9) The control unit of (8) gives a privilege (for example, a special game effect) to the player when the alert display is selected from the menu display.

  (10) When the alert display is selected from the menu display, the control unit (8) accepts a setting change related to the alert display (for example, the alert level, frequency, time, mode, etc.).

(11) The control unit (2) detects a game trend of the player, and changes the setting related to alerting based on the detected game trend.
(12) The control unit of (1) is based on a game effect intervention operation (for example, a push button 25 pressing operation or repeated hitting, a game effect selecting operation, a game effect canceling operation, etc.) intervening in the effect of the gaming machine 10. To raise awareness about the game.

  (13) The control unit of (12) performs first alerting (background scroll display 740) that alerts in a predetermined manner, alerting in a prescribed manner, and game effect (for example, reliability regarding game progress). Notification) is selectively performed in a second time alert (background scroll display 740a).

(14) When receiving the cancel operation, the control unit (13) cancels the first alert and the second alert.
(15) The controller of (1) changes the alerting mode when repeatedly alerting.

  (16) The gaming machine 10 includes a detection unit (for example, a touch switch signal (a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24)) and a control unit (the game control device 100, the effect control device 300). Detecting a player's game state (for example, a game effect intervention operation and a setting operation) The control unit is related to the game sink based on the player's game state (game start, continuation, interruption, etc.) detected by the detection unit. Raise attention.

(17) The control unit of (16) alerts every predetermined time in consecutive games.
[Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, alerting is performed using the RTC 338. The gaming machine 10 alerts at a preset timing for alerting, and randomly alerts at a preset time zone for alerting.

[Warning process]
The alerting process for alerting using the RTC 338 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the alerting process in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment. The attention calling process is a process for determining whether or not to call attention. The attention calling process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit can execute the process independently of the main process described with reference to FIG.

  [Step D151] The control unit acquires an alerting schedule. The alerting schedule defines the alerting timing and the alerting time zone. A default schedule is prepared in advance for the alerting schedule, but it may be updated by a game arcade or a player. For example, the control unit can update the alerting schedule according to the input contents received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. The alerting schedule will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D152] The control unit refers to the attention calling timing (attention calling schedule) and the RTC 338, and determines whether or not the current time specified from the RTC 338 is the attention calling timing. A control part progresses to step D157, when the present time is an alerting timing. On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step D153 when the current time is not the alerting timing.

  [Step D153] The control unit refers to the attention time zone (attention schedule) and the RTC 338, and determines whether or not the current time specified from the RTC 338 is the attention time zone. A control part progresses to step D154, when the present time is an alerting time slot | zone. On the other hand, a control part progresses to step D151, when the present time is not an alerting time slot | zone.

  [Step D154] The control unit determines whether or not it is an alert lottery opportunity. A control part progresses to step D155, when it is an alerting lottery opportunity, and when not an alerting lottery opportunity, it progresses to step D151. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the attention drawing lottery as a symbol variation start timing, and once per symbol variation. Note that the gaming machine 10 may determine the lottery opportunity based on other game amounts, such as an alert lottery opportunity every minute.

  [Step D155] The control unit performs an attention drawing lottery. The lottery probability may be set in advance, or may be set based on a gaming state or a gaming amount. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set a 1/50 lottery probability for a one-hour continuous game and a 1/30 lottery probability for a two-hour continuous game.

  [Step D156] The control unit determines whether or not the attention drawing lottery has been won. The control unit proceeds to step D157 when the attention drawing lottery is won, and proceeds to step D151 when the attention drawing lottery is not won.

  [Step D157] The control unit sets the alert (flag) in response to the establishment of the alert condition (the alert timing or the winning of the alert lottery in the alert time zone). After setting the alerting, the control unit proceeds to step D151 and prepares for the next alerting.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can alert at a preset time and can alert at an appropriate frequency in a preset time zone.
Next, the alerting schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alerting timing (notice reminding schedule) and an alerting time zone (notice reminding schedule) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The alerting schedule is stored in the storage unit (eg, PROM 321, RAM 322, FeRAM 323, etc.) of the effect control device 300. The alerting schedule includes the alerting timing and the alerting time period. (1) The alerting timing defines four setting timings from timing 1 to timing 4. Each setting timing defines an alerting timing and an alerting mode (including display and / or sound) at the alerting timing. For example, the setting timing “timing 1” defines that the alerting timing is “10:00” every day, and alerting is performed in the alerting mode “pattern 1”. The setting timing “timing 2” defines that the alerting timing is “April 1 every year” and that alerting is performed in the alerting mode “pattern 2”. The setting timing “timing 3” defines that the alerting timing is “19:00” from Monday to Friday, and alerting is performed in the alerting mode “pattern 3”. The setting timing “timing 4” specifies that the alerting timing is “pattern 4” with the alerting timing being 15:00 on every Saturday and Sunday.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can call attention in a specific warning mode at a specific date and time. Such a gaming machine 10 can be alerted in different alerting modes depending on the time of day, for example, morning, noon, evening, and night. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can call attention in a manner of calling different in a month, for example, at the beginning of the month, at the end of the month, on a weekday, or on a holiday. Further, such a gaming machine 10 can be alerted in different alerting modes depending on the number of working days of the gaming machine 10, for example, the first day of introduction, one week after introduction, and one month after introduction. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate alerting according to the installation environment of the gaming machine 10.

  (2) The alerting time zone defines four set time zones from time zone 1 to time zone 4. In each set time zone, an alerting time zone, a lottery probability, and an alerting mode at the time of winning the alerting lottery are defined. For example, in the set time zone “time zone 1”, from 10:00 to 22:00 every day, a lottery probability “1/10000” is drawn, and attention is drawn in the alert mode “pattern 5” when winning. Stipulate that The set time zone “time zone 2” is the time of caution from 15:00 to 15:30 on May 1 every year, and draws with a lottery probability “1/5”. Stipulates that alerts be issued. In the set time zone “time zone 3”, from 20:00 to 22:00 from Monday to Friday every week, the lottery probability “1/200” is used for lottery. Specify that alerts are to be issued. In the set time zone “time zone 4”, every Saturday and Sunday from 16:00 to 18:00, the attention time zone is set, and a lottery probability “1/200” is drawn. Specify that alerts are to be issued.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can call attention in a specific alerting mode when a predetermined attention drawing lottery is won at a specific date and time. Such a gaming machine 10 can avoid a plurality of gaming machines 10 calling attention of the same content at the same timing when the gaming machines 10 call attention in a game hall. Moreover, such a gaming machine 10 can give rarity to alerting itself by giving attention in a specific alerting mode, and can give interest to alerting itself. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may give a privilege (for example, a special game effect) to an alert that is made at a specific timing or a specific alert that is made by a lottery.

Next, some of the alerting modes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of an alert mode according to the fourth embodiment.
The display screen 760 shown in (1) is one of the attention display screens (attention mode) defined by the attention schedule. Display screen 760 includes a message display 761 and a character display 762. For example, the display screen 760 displays a message “Caution on the entrenchment! Let's play moderately” as the message display 761 and a character such as a pig as the character display 762.

  The display screen 760a shown in (2) is one of the attention display screens (attention modes) defined by the attention schedule. Display screen 760a includes message display 761a and character display 762a. For example, the display screen 760a displays the message “Caution on the sinking! Let's take a break moderately” as the message display 761a, and displays a character such as a tiger as the character display 762a.

  The display screen 760b shown in (3) is one of the attention display screens (attention modes) defined by the attention schedule. Display screen 760b includes message display 761b and character display 762b. For example, the display screen 760b displays a message “Caution on falling into the eyes! Closed and calm down soon” as the message display 761b, and a character such as a lion as the character display 762b.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can call attention in a warning manner according to the date and time by detecting the date and time using the RTC 338. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform alerting in an appropriate alerting mode according to the environment in which the player plays.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a time acquisition unit (for example, RTC 338), a plan storage unit (for example, PROM 321, RAM 322, FeRAM 323, etc.), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The time acquisition unit acquires time during the game (for example, date information). The plan storage unit stores a reminder plan (a reminder timing (a reminder schedule), a reminder time zone (a reminder schedule)). The control unit alerts the player about the game ingestion based on the time acquired by the time acquisition unit and the alert plan stored in the plan storage unit.

(2) The plan storage unit of (1) stores the alerting timing, and the control unit alerts at the alerting timing.
(3) The plan storage unit of (1) stores the alert time zone, and the control unit alerts the alert time zone.

(4) The control unit of (3) performs an alert lottery during the alert time zone, and alerts when the alert lottery is won.
(5) The control unit of (4) performs the attention drawing lottery at the first lottery probability in the first alerting time zone, and the second lottery different from the first lottery probability in the second alerting time zone. Do a lottery with a probability.

(6) The control unit of (1) performs alerting in the alerting plan mode corresponding to the alerting plan.
[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, the game control device 100 determines whether or not to perform alerting, and instructs the effect control device 300 to execute alerting using a command transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  First, alerting performed at the time of RAM initialization and power failure recovery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of a RAM initialization command and a power failure recovery command according to the fifth embodiment.

  The game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300 in step S30 of the main process (see FIGS. 6 and 7), and transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery to the effect control device 300 in step S25. To do.

  (1) The RAM initialization command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits when the RAM is initialized. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “1” (command name “model designation”). The command name “model designation” includes MODE “ACH” and any one of ACTION “10H” to ACTION “30H” depending on the model. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the order of transmission “2” (command name “number of special figure 1 hold”). The command name “Special Figure 1 Hold Number” includes MODE “A1H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to no hold. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “number of special figure 2 hold”). The command name “Special Figure 2 Hold Number” includes MODE “A2H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to no hold. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “4” (command name “probability information”). The command name “probability information” includes MODE “A0H” and ACTION “01H” corresponding to the initial state. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “5-1” or the transmission order “5-2” as the command of the transmission order “5”. For example, the game control device 100 can transmit a command corresponding to the transmission order “5-1” or the transmission order “5-2” in accordance with the set content. The command name “power-on (no alert)” includes MODE “AAH” and the corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “power on (with warning)” includes MODE “AAH” and the corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a RAM initialization command including the command name “power on (no alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when receiving a RAM initialization command including the command name “power on (with warning)”.

  (2) The command at the time of power failure recovery indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of power failure recovery. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “1” (command name “model designation”). The command name “model designation” includes MODE “ACH” and any one of ACTION “10H” to ACTION “30H” depending on the model. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the order of transmission “2” (command name “number of special figure 1 hold”). The command name “special figure 1 hold number” includes MODE “A1H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “number of special figure 2 hold”). The command name “special figure 2 hold number” includes MODE “A2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “4” (command name “probability information”). The command name “probability information” includes MODE “A0H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “07H” corresponding to various gaming states. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits one of commands corresponding to the transmission order “5-4” from the transmission order “5-1” as the command of the transmission order “5”. For example, the game control device 100 can transmit any of commands corresponding to the transmission order “5-4” from the transmission order “5-1” according to the set content. The command name “customer waiting demonstration (no alert)” includes MODE “80H” and the corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “customer waiting demonstration (with alert)” includes MODE “80H” and the corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The command name “power failure recovery (no alert)” includes MODE “ABH” and the corresponding ACTION “55H”. The command name “recovery from power failure (with alert)” includes MODE “ABH” and the corresponding ACTION “AAH”. The production control device 300 does not issue a warning alert when receiving a power failure recovery command including the command name “customer waiting demonstration (no alert)” or the command name “power failure recovery (not alert)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notification when receiving a power failure recovery command including the command name “customer waiting demonstration (with warning)” or the command name “power failure recovery (with warning)”.

Next, alerting that is performed during variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable command according to the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special game processing (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

  The command at the time of change (variable command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the start of the change of the special figure game. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command (command name “decorative symbol designation”) in the transmission order “1”. The command name “decoration design designation” includes MODE “85H” and any one of ACTION “11H” to ACTION “7FH” depending on the ornament design. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” or the transmission order “2-2” as the command of the transmission order “2”. For example, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” when the alert (flag) is reset, and the transmission order “flag” when the alert (flag) is set. A command corresponding to “2-2” can be transmitted. The command name “change pattern designation (no alert)” includes any one of MODE “COH” to MODE “D2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each change pattern. The command name “change pattern designation (with warning)” includes any one of MODE “D3H” to MODE “D7H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each change pattern. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “number of special figure 1 hold”). The command name “special figure 1 hold number” includes MODE “A1H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “4” (command name “number of special figure 2 hold”). The command name “special figure 2 hold number” includes MODE “A2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when a command at the time of change including the command name “change pattern designation (no alerting)” is received. The production control device 300 performs a warning notification when a command at the time of change including the command name “change pattern designation (with warning)” is received.

Next, the alerting performed during the pre-reading variation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetch fluctuation command according to the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special game processing (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

  The prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the start of prefetch fluctuation of the special figure game. First, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the order of transmission “1” (command name “designation of prefetched decorative symbols”). The command name “prefetch decoration designating” includes MODE “FDH” and any one of ACTION “11H” to ACTION “7FH” depending on the prefetch decoration design. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” or the transmission order “2-2” as the command of the transmission order “2”. For example, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command corresponding to the transmission order “2-1” when the alert (flag) is reset, and the transmission order “flag” when the alert (flag) is set. A command corresponding to “2-2” can be transmitted. The command name “designation of prefetch variation pattern (no warning)” includes any one of MODE “EOH” to MODE “F2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each prefetch variation pattern. The command name “prefetch fluctuation pattern designation (with warning)” includes any one of MODE “F3H” to MODE “F7H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “7FH” corresponding to each prefetch fluctuation pattern. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “3” (command name “number of special figure 1 hold”). The command name “special figure 1 hold number” includes MODE “A1H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command in the transmission order “4” (command name “number of special figure 2 hold”). The command name “special figure 2 hold number” includes MODE “A2H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “05H” corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a command at the time of change including the command name “prefetched variation pattern designation (no alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when a command at the time of change including the command name “prefetch fluctuation pattern designation (with warning)” is received.

Next, alerting performed according to the progress of the special figure game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special game command according to the fifth embodiment.
The game control device 100 sets an effect command in the special game processing (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

  The special figure game command indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits at the time of a special figure game state transition. Special figure game commands include a customer waiting demo command that is sent when the state of the special figure game transitions to a customer waiting demo, a fanfare command that is sent when the state of the special figure game transitions to a fanfare, and a special figure game The special prize opening n-th command to be transmitted when the state of the special prize opening is changed to the nth opening of the special prize opening, the interval command to be transmitted when the state of the special figure game changes to the interval, and the state of the special figure game are ending And an ending command to be transmitted when transitioning to.

  The customer-waiting demo command has a command name “customer-waiting demo (no alerting)” and a command name “customer-waiting demo (with alerting)”. The command name “customer waiting demonstration (no alert)” includes MODE “80H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “customer waiting demonstration (with warning)” includes MODE “80H” and any one of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” depending on the type of warning. The production control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a special game command including the command name “customer waiting demonstration (no alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when receiving a special game command including the command name “customer waiting demonstration (with warning)”.

  The fanfare command has a command name “fanfare (no alerting)” and a command name “fanfare (with alerting)”. The command name “fanfare (no alert)” includes MODE “81H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “fanfare (with warning)” includes MODE “81H” and any of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” depending on the type of warning. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a special game command including the command name “fanfare (no alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notification when a special game command including the command name “fanfare (with warning)” is received.

  The nth opening command for the big prize opening has a command name “nth opening for the big winning opening (no alerting)” and a command name “nth opening for the big winning opening (with alerting)”. The command name “Large winning opening open n times (no alert)” includes MODE “82H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to ACTION “10H” depending on the number of opening of the large winning opening (number of rounds). The command name “Large winning opening nth (with alert)” includes MODE “82H” and any one of ACTION “11H” to ACTION “20H” depending on the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). The production control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when a special game command including the command name “Large winning opening open nth (no alerting)” is received. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when a special game command including the command name “nth prize opening opening nth (with warning)” is received.

  The interval command has a command name “interval (no alert)” and a command name “interval (with alert)”. The command name “interval (no alert)” includes MODE “83H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “interval (with warning)” includes MODE “83H” and any one of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” depending on the mode of warning. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a special game command including the command name “interval (not alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when a special game command including the command name “interval (with warning)” is received.

  The ending command has a command name “ENDING (no alert)” and a command name “ENDING (with alert)”. The command name “ending (no alert)” includes MODE “84H” and ACTION “01H”. The command name “ending (with alert)” includes MODE “84H” and any one of ACTION “02H” to ACTION “0FH” depending on the mode of alerting. The effect control device 300 does not perform alerting notification when receiving a special game command that includes the command name “ending (no alerting)”. The production control device 300 issues a warning notice when a special game command including the command name “interval (with warning)” is received.

  In this way, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not to perform the alerting and use the command transmitted to the effect control device 300 to instruct the effect control device 300 to execute the alerting. Moreover, the game control apparatus 100 can specify the alert mode and instruct the performance control apparatus 300 to execute the alert.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a game control unit (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and an effect device (display device 41, speaker 19a, And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) for controlling 19b). The game control unit decides whether or not to execute the alert regarding the game sneak in, and instructs the effect control unit to transmit the effect (transmission of the effect command) including whether or not to execute the alert. The production control unit receives an instruction including whether or not to execute the alert from the game control unit, and performs the alert using the effect device.

(2) The game control unit in (1) specifies the alert mode and instructs the effect control unit to execute the alert.
The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW, and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk).

  When distributing the program, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in a storage device of a server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. In addition, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 41 Display apparatus 19a, 19b Speaker 100 Game control apparatus 300 Effect control apparatus

Claims (1)

A reception unit that accepts operations that do not affect game results;
A control unit for alerting the user about the intrusion of the game based on the operation received by the reception unit;
Including gaming machines.

Images